Marantz Av Pre Tuner Av7005 Users Manual 1.AV7005U_ENG
AV7005 to the manual c8b2c294-4ed4-4c82-97a7-de02560a9ba6
2015-02-03
: Marantz Marantz-Av-Pre-Tuner-Av7005-Users-Manual-466329 marantz-av-pre-tuner-av7005-users-manual-466329 marantz pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
AV Pre Tuner
AV7005
ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS ENGLISH
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:54
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:54
I
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAIS
n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug
from the wall socket outlet.
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit
and must be within easy access by the user.
PRECAUTION:
Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur, débranchez
la prise de la prise murale.
La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement l’alimentation de
l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder facilement.
PRECAUCIÓN:
Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentación eléctrica,
desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared.
El enchufe de la alimentación eléctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por completo
el suministro de alimentación eléctrica a la unidad y debe de encontrarse en
un lugar al que el usuario tenga fácil acceso.
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A
polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Product Name: AV Pre Tuner
Model Number: AV7005
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Marantz America, Inc.
(a D & M Holdings Company)
100 Corporate Drive,
Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A.
Tel. (630) 741-0300
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained
in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly
approved by Marantz may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use
the product.
3. IMPORTANT
When connecting this product to network hub or router, use only shielded
STP or ScTP LAN cables which is available at retailer.
Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
4. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or
an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For Canadian customers:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:54
II
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
n NOTES ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION / NOTAS SOBRE EL USO
WARNINGS AVERTISSEMENTS ADVERTENCIAS
• Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when
installed in a rack.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and
dust.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the unit
for long periods of time.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner
come in contact with the unit.
• Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.
• Ventilation should not be impeded by covering
the ventilation openings with items, such as
newspapers, tablecloths or curtains.
• Naked flame sources such as lighted candles
should not be placed on the unit.
• Observe and follow local regulations regarding
battery disposal.
• Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing
fluids.
• Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, on the unit.
• Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.
• When the switch is in the OFF position, the
equipment is not completely switched off from
MAINS.
• The equipment shall be installed near the
power supply so that the power supply is easily
accessible.
• Eviter des températures élevées.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur
suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec
précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la
poussière.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque
l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues
périodes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans
l’appareil.
• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du
benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une
manière ou d’une autre.
• Ne pas recouvrir les orifices de ventilation avec
des objets tels que des journaux, nappes ou
rideaux. Cela entraverait la ventilation.
• Ne jamais placer de flamme nue sur l’appareil,
notamment des bougies allumées.
• Veillez à respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque
vous jetez les piles usagées.
• L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à
l’humidité.
• Ne pas poser d’objet contenant du liquide, par
exemple un vase, sur l’appareil.
• Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec
les mains mouillées.
• Lorsque l’interrupteur est sur la position OFF,
l’appareil n’est pas complètement déconnecté du
SECTEUR (MAINS).
• L’appareil sera installé près de la source
d’alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit
facilement accessible.
• Evite altas temperaturas.
Permite la suficiente dispersión del calor cuando
está instalado en la consola.
• Maneje el cordón de energía con cuidado.
Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el
cordón de energía.
• Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad, agua y
polvo.
• Desconecte el cordón de energía cuando no
utilice el equipo por mucho tiempo.
• No obstruya los orificios de ventilación.
• No deje objetos extraños dentro del equipo.
• No permita el contacto de insecticidas, gasolina
y diluyentes con el equipo.
• Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de
ninguna manera.
• La ventilación no debe quedar obstruida por
haberse cubierto las aperturas con objetos como
periódicos, manteles o cortinas.
• No deberán colocarse sobre el aparato fuentes
inflamables sin protección, como velas
encendidas.
• A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete la
normativa para el cuidado del medio ambiente.
• No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras
cuando se utilice.
• No colocar sobre el aparato objetos llenos de
líquido, como jarros.
• No maneje el cable de alimentación con las
manos mojadas.
• Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el
equipo no está completamente desconectado de
la alimentación MAINS.
• El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de
alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder
a ella.
n CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
PRÉCAUTIONS D’INSTALLATION
EMPLAZAMIENTO DE LA INSTALACIÓN
z z
z
Wall
Paroi
Pared
z
zFor proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined
space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
• More than 0.3 m (12 in.) is recommended.
• Do not place any other equipment on this unit.
zPour permettre la dissipation de chaleur requise, n’installez
pas cette unité dans un espace confiné tel qu’une bibliothèque
ou un endroit similaire.
• Une distance de plus de 0,3 m (12 po) est recommandée.
• Ne placez aucun matériel sur cet appareil.
zPara la dispersión del calor adecuadamente, no instale este
equipo en un lugar confinado tal como una librería o unidad
similar.
• Se recomienda dejar más de 0,3 m (12 pulg.) alrededor.
• No coloque ningún otro equipo sobre la unidad.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:55
1
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Contents
Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product. To ensure proper operation, please read this user guide carefully before using the product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Getting started
Simple version (Simple setup guide) ··························4
Basic version ··········································································13
Connections ·················································································14
Important information ·································································14
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device ····································15
Connecting a TV··········································································17
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ················································17
Connecting a DVD player ····························································18
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) ····················18
Connecting a video cassette recorder ········································19
Connecting a digital camcorder ··················································19
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port ·····20
Connecting a CD player ······························································20
Connecting a CD recorder ··························································21
Connecting a record player ·························································21
Connecting an antenna ·······························································22
Connecting a wireless receiver (RX101) ·····································23
Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal ·········23
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ········································24
Playback (Basic operation) ·························································25
Important information ·································································25
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player ····································26
Playing a CD player ·····································································26
Playing an iPod® ·········································································27
Playing a USB memory device ····················································28
Tuning in radio stations ·······························································30
Playing a network audio ······························································34
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) ··························44
Multi-channel playback ·······························································44
Stereo playback ··········································································46
Direct playback ···········································································46
Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby Headphone playback ·····················46
Advanced version ·······························································47
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) ·······48
Install ··························································································48
Connect ······················································································49
Set up speakers ··········································································52
Connections (Advanced connection)·········································53
REMOTE CONTROL jacks ··························································53
RS-232C connector ·····································································54
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ···················································54
Playback (Advanced operation) ·················································55
Convenient functions ··································································55
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) ··························61
Audio output ···············································································61
Video output ···············································································62
Playback ······················································································62
How to make detailed settings ··················································63
Menu map ··················································································63
Examples of menu and front display ··········································64
Inputting characters ···································································65
Input Setup ·················································································66
Audio/Video Adjust ·····································································72
Manual Setup··············································································77
Information ·················································································88
Other settings ··············································································89
Remote control settings ·····························································89
Switches light illumination on/off ···············································89
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit ······90
Operating AV equipment ····························································90
Registering preset codes ····························································91
Operating components ·······························································92
Operating learn function ·····························································93
Operating macro function ···························································95
Setting the back light ··································································96
Information ·············································································97
Part names and functions···························································98
Front panel ··················································································98
Display ························································································99
Rear panel ·················································································100
Remote control unit ··································································101
Other information ·····································································103
Trademark information ······························································103
Surround ···················································································104
Relationship between video signals and monitor output ··········108
Explanation of terms ·································································109
Troubleshooting ········································································112
Resetting the microprocessor ··················································115
Specifications ············································································116
Getting started ··············································································1
Accessories ··················································································2
About this manual ·········································································2
Features ························································································2
Cautions on handling ····································································3
List of preset codes ··································End of this manual
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:55
2
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Features
Current feedback amplifi er
This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifi er circuit
for its preamplifi er so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and
other equipment that support high-defi nition audio formats can
be amplifi ed with high fi delity. The high-speed current feedback
amplifi er also reproduces a natural sound space.
Supports HDMI 1.4a with 3D, ARC, Deep Color,
x.v.Color , Auto Lipsync and HDMI control function
This unit can output 3D video signals input from a Blu-ray Disc
player to a TV that supports a 3D system. This unit also supports
the ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, which reproduces TV
sound with this unit via an HDMI cable used for connecting the
unit and a TVz1.
z1 The TV should support the ARC function.
Internet radio, music and photo streaming via
networkz2
This unit can playback audio fi les and still images such as
photographs that are stored on your computer via a network. You
can also listen to internet radio and a whole host of other online
musicz3 that uses network technology.
z2 An internet connection is required.
z3 You may be required to sign a service agreement with the
companies that provide particular services.
6-HDMI inputs and 2-outputs
The unit is equipped with 6 HDMI input connectors for connecting
devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player,
game machine, HD video camera, etc.
One of the 6 input connectors of this unit is provided on the front
panel so that you can easily connect and display images and videos
recorded in a digital still camera or digital video camera.
High defi nition audio support
The unit is equipped with a decoder which supports high-quality
digital audio format for Blu-ray Disc players such as Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.
Audyssey DSX™
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX decoder. By connecting
front height speakers to the power amp and using Audyssey DSX
playback, you can experience a more power playback expression
in the height audio range. By connecting front wide speakers, you
can experience a more powerful playback expression in the wide
audio range.
Easy to use, Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with an easy to see “Graphical User
Interface” that uses menu displays and levels. The use of level
displays increases operability of the unit.
All sources are up-scaled to 1080p
The unit is provided with an HDMI video up-scaling function that
converts an analog video signal input to the unit to a 1080p (HD
resolution) signal and supplies it to a TV via the HDMI connector.
This enables the unit and a TV connected with a single HDMI cable
and any video source to be reproduced precisely with HD level of
quality.
Direct play for iPod® and iPhone® via USB
Music data from an iPod can be played back if you connect the
USB cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and
also an iPod can be controlled with the remote control unit for this
unit.
M-XPort (Marantz-eXtension Port)
This unit is equipped with the M-XPort, a Marantz original innovation
that provides outstanding expandability. You can connect the
Wireless Receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this port.
UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal for front height
channel
This unit is equipped with a dedicated UNBALANCED PRE OUT
terminal on the rear panel. You can enjoy 7.1-channel playback
using the front height channel and 7.1-channel playback using the
surround back channel, without having to reconnect the speakers.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
q User guide ............................................................................... 1
w Warranty card (for USA) ..........................................................1
e Warranty card (for CANADA) ................................................... 1
r Power cord .............................................................................. 1
t Remote control unit (RC011SR) .............................................. 1
y R03/AAA batteries ...................................................................2
u Setup microphone (ACM1H) ................................................... 1
i AM loop antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................... 1
o FM indoor antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................ 1
tr
i o
u
About this manual
nOperation buttons
The operations described in this guide are based mainly on remote
control operation.
nSymbols
vThis symbol indicates a reference page on which
related information is described.
This symbol indicates a supplementary information
and tips for operations.
NOTE This symbol indicates a supplementary information
and tips for operations.
nIllustrations
Note that the illustrations in these instructions are for explanation
purposes and may differ from the actual unit.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:57
3
Basic version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Simple version
Cautions on handling
• Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
• Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is
set to the standby mode. When going on vacation or leaving home
for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the
power outlet.
• About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on
the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate
properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature
before using the unit.
• Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If that
occurs, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
• Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units
before moving the unit.
• About Care
• Wipe the cabinet and control panel clean with a soft cloth.
• Follow the instructions when using a chemical cleaner.
• Benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents as well as
insecticide may cause material changes and discoloration if brought
into contact with the unit, and should therefore not be used.
Remote Power Control
This unit is equipped with a remote power control function. When
a Marantz Power Amplifi er MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is
connected to this unit, this unit’s power can be switched ON/OFF
together with the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 power supply.
Connection to the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is a ground
fl oating connection that prevents negative infl uences on sound
quality as far as possible.
Other features
• Dolby Virtual Speaker (vpage46)
• Dolby Headphone (vpage46)
• DTS Neural Surround (vpage45)
Features
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 3 2010/08/23 18:31:57
Simple
version
4
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Simple version (Simple setup guide)
Here, we explain the entire setup procedure, from unboxing the unit to using it in a home theater.
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround
back speakers. For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back
speakers), see page 48.
nBefore connecting the unit, turn off the power to all devices.
nFor operation of the connected devices, refer to the user manuals for each device.
Play back
disc (vpage12)
Enjoy Blu-ray Disc and DVD
in surround sound.
5
Set up
speakers
(vpage8)
Use the setup microphone
(ACM1H) included with the
product, for automatic
setup.
4
Turn on
power(vpage7)
3
Connect
(vpage5)
Connect 7.1-channel
speakers, a TV and
Blu-ray Disc player
equipped with an HDMI
connector.
2
Install
(vpage5)
Enjoy better audio, using
the correct install method.
1
Finish
STEP 6
Store
STEP 5
Check
STEP 4
Calculation
STEP 3
Measurement
STEP 2
Speaker
Detection
STEP 1
Preparation
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 4 2010/08/23 18:31:59
5
Basic version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Simple version
Power amp
•Connect a power amp (sold separately) to the PRE OUT terminal of this unit.
•This unit has an UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal and BALANCED PRE OUT
terminal. Connect to the correct terminal for your power amp.
•Connect the speakers to the power amp.
•For details on speaker connections, see the User Guide for the power amp.
Install 12 3 4 5
This unit can perform 2.0/2.1 to 7.1-channel surround playback.
This page provides the speaker installation procedure for the
7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers as an example.
The default setting is 7.1-channel. You can also perform 5.1-channel playback.
To perform 5.1-channel playback, connect5.1-channel speakers only.
Use Audyssey Auto Setup function of this unit to automatically detect the
number of connected speakers and perform optimal settings for the speakers
to be used.
FL FR
C
SBL SBR
SL SR
SW
90 – 110˚
22 – 30˚
135 – 150˚
Listening
position
FL Front speaker (L) • Install the surround speakers in a position 2 to
3 ft (60 to 90 cm) higher than ear level.
Surround back
speaker
• Point slightly
downwards
Front
speaker
Surround
speaker
2 – 3 ft /
60 – 90 cm
GViewed from the sideH
FR Front speaker (R)
CCenter speaker
SW Subwoofer
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
1 Connect 123 4 5
2
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 5 2010/08/23 18:32:00
6
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connect
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
nExample of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025
power amp
Connecting the unbalanced PRE OUT terminal
SBL SBR
FL FR
C
SL SR
SW
Speaker cables
(sold separately)
Audio cable
(sold separately)
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
GMM7055H
GMM7025H
Connecting the balanced PRE OUT terminal
SBL SBR
FL FR
C
SL SR
SW
Speaker cables
(sold separately)
Audio cable
(sold separately)
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
GMM7055H
GMM7025H
GAV7005 XLR connector PIN
arrangementH
12
3
q GND (Ground)
w HOT (Hot)
e COLD (Cold)
The PIN arrangement in this device uses
the European method.
In the USA method, w is COLD, and e
is HOT.
When connecting a device that utilizes
the USA type of PIN arrangement, replace
the w and e plugs on one side of the
balanced cable.
NOTE
Do not short the HOT and GND or COLD
and GND for use.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 6 2010/08/23 18:32:03
7
Basic version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Simple version
Blu-ray Disc player and TV
Use only an HDMI (High Defi nition Multimedia Interface) cable that bears the HDMI
logo (a genuine HDMI product). Using a cable without the HDMI logo (a non-genuine
HDMI product) may result in abnormal playback.
When outputting Deep Color or 1080p, etc., we recommend you use a “High Speed
HDMI cable” or a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”for enhanced high-quality
playback.
IN
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz) Power cord
(supplied)
HDMI cable
(sold separately)
HDMI cable
(sold separately)
Blu-ray Disc player
TV
NOTE
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.
Connect Turn on power 1 2 34 5
3
1Turn on the TV and subwoofer
power.
Power on
2Change the TV input to the input of
this unit.
3Press ON to turn on power to the unit.
The power indicator switches off, and power
is supplied to the unit.
Power on
Power on
4Turn on the power amp power.
NOTE
Before you use the remote control unit for the fi rst
time, be sure to insert the batteries (vpage102
“Inserting the batteries”).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 7 2010/08/23 18:32:07
8
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
About setup microphone placement
• Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone successively
at multiple positions throughout the entire listening area, as shown in
GExample qH. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more
positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).
• Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in
more effective correction.
FL SW C FR
SR
SBL SBR
SL *M
FL SW C FR
SR
SBL SBR
SL *M
( : Measuring positions)
GExample qH GExample wH
( : Measuring positions)
FL Front speaker (L) SL Surround speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SR Surround speaker (R)
CCenter speaker SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SW Subwoofer SBR Surround back speaker (R)
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or
where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before
starting Audyssey Auto Setup, place the setup microphone in the main listening
position. Audyssey MultEQ® XT uses the measurements from this position to
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for
the subwoofer.
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
1Prepare the setup
microphone
Mount the setup microphone on a
tripod or stand and place it in the
main listening position.
When placing the setup microphone, adjust
the height of the sound receptor to the level
of the listener’s ear.
Sound receptor Setup
microphone
NOTE
• Do not hold the setup microphone in your hand
during measurements.
• Avoid placing the setup microphone close to a
seat back or wall as sound refl ections may give
inaccurate results.
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and
listening room are measured and the optimum settings are
made automatically. This is called “Audyssey Auto Setup”.
To perform measurement, place the setup microphone
in multiple locations all around the listening area. For
best results, we recommend you measure in six or
more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight
positions).
•When performing Audyssey Auto Setup, MultEQ® XT/
Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® functions become active
(vpage74, 75).
•To set up the speakers manually, use “Speaker Setup”
(vpage78) on the menu.
NOTE
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fl uorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other
devices as measurements may be affected by these sounds.
• Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during the
measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause
measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not in use).
• Do not unplug the setup microphone from the main unit until Audyssey Auto
Setup is completed.
• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles
in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate
readings.
• Loud test sounds may be played during Audyssey
Auto setup. This is part of normal operation. If there
is background noise in room, these test signals will
increase in volume.
• Operating VOLUME +, – during the measurements will
cancel the measurements.
• Measurement cannot be performed when headphones
are connected.
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup) 1 2 3 45
4
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 8 2010/08/23 18:32:08
9
Basic version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Simple version
2 Set up the subwoofer
If using a subwoofer capable of the
following adjustments, set up the
subwoofer as shown below.
nWhen using a subwoofer with a direct
mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the
volume adjustment and crossover frequency
setting.
nWhen using a subwoofer without a
direct mode
Make the following settings:
• Volume : “12 o’clock position”
• Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest
Frequency”
• Low pass fi lter : “Off”
• Standby mode : “Off”
NOTE
When you use two subwoofers, please adjust
the subwoofer volume controls individually so
that each subwoofer level is as close as possible
to 75 dB using the test tone (vpage79) before
Audyssey Auto Setup.
3Set up the remote control
unit
nSet up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit
to ampli er operation mode.
Press AMP
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
STEP 1
Preparation
NOTE
If “Caution” is displayed:
Go to “Error messages” (vpage 11), check
any related items, and perform the necessary
procedures.
If the problem is resolved, return and restart
“Audyssey Auto Setup”.
When performing Audyssey Auto
Setup over again
Press ui to select “Retry”, and then press ENTER.
When measuring has stopped
Press RETURN, to the “Cancel Auto Setup?”
prompt is displayed.
Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Setting up the speakers again
Repeat the operation from step 4 of
STEP1 Preparation .
STEP 2
Speaker Detection
• In STEP 2, you will perform measurements at the
main listening position.
• This step automatically checks the speaker
confi guration and speaker size, and calculates the
channel level, distance, and crossover frequency.
It also corrects distortion in the listening area.
6Select “Measure” and then press
ENTER.
When measuring begins, a test tone is
output from each speaker.
• Measurement requires several minutes.
7The detected speakers are displayed.
[2/6]
STEP2 Spkr Detect Check
Go to Step 3 (Measurement) after speaker check
Retry
Next Measurement
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
S.Back
F.Height
F.Wide
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2spkrs
No
No
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
NOTE
If a connected speaker is not displayed, the
speaker may not be connected correctly. Check
the speaker connection.
8Use ui to select “Next 1
Measurement” and then press ENTER.
4Connect the setup microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
[1/6]
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
items if necessary.
Start Auto Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
This screen provides the method for setting
up 7.1-channel playback using surround back
speakers. For the method of setting up speakers
other than the 7.1-channel system, select “Amp
Assign” and perform step 3 and 4 of “Set up
“Amp Assign”” (vpage52).
If unused channels are set with “Channel
Select”, measuring time can be shortened. For
setting, perform steps 5 to 9 of “Set up “Channel
Select”” (vpage52).
5Use ui to select “Auto Setup Start”
and then press ENTER.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 9 2010/08/23 18:32:08
10
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
12
Use ui to select the item you want
to check, and then press ENTER.
[5/6]
STEP5 Check
Check processing res-
ults. To proceed,press
“Next”
Select item to check
Spkr Config Check
Distance Check
Ch. Level Check
Crossover Check
Next Store
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• Subwoofers may measure a greater reported
distance than the actual distance due to added
electrical delay common in subwoofers.
• If you want to check another item, press
RETURN.
13
Use ui to select “Next 1 Store”
and then press ENTER.
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
STEP 4
Calculation
STEP 5
Check
14
Select “Store” and then press ENTER.
Save the measurement results.
[6/6]
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP6 Store
Now storing...
Please wait.
25%
MultEQ XT
[6/6]
STEP6 Store
Press “Store” to store
calculation results.
Apply and store measurement result
Store
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• Saving the results requires about 10 seconds.
• If the measuring results are not to be saved,
press RETURN. A message “Cancel Auto
Setup?” will be displayed. Press o then select
“Yes”. All the measured Audyssey Auto Setup
data will be erased.
NOTE
During saving of measurement results, be sure
not to turn off the power.
NOTE
• If the result differs from the actual connection
status, or if “Caution!” is displayed, see “Error
messages” (vpage11). Then carry out Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
• If the result still differs from the actual connection
status after remeasurement or the error message
still appears, it is possible that the speakers
are not connected properly. Turn this unit off,
check the speaker connections and repeat the
measurement process from the beginning.
• If you change speaker positions or orientation,
perform Audyssey Auto Setup again to fi nd the
optimal equalizer settings.
11
On the STEP3 screen, use ui
to select “Next 1 Calculation”, and
then press ENTER.
Measuring results are analyzed, and the
frequency response of each speaker in the
listening room is determined.
[4/6]
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP4 Calculation
Now calculating...
Please wait.
25%
MultEQ XT
• Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The
time required for this analysis depends on the
number of speakers connected.
The more connected speakers there are, the
longer it takes to perform analysis.
STEP 6
Store
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
• In STEP 3, you will perform measurements at
multiple positions (two to eight positions) other
than the main listening position.
• You can achieve a more effective correction of
distortion within the listening area by performing
measurements at multiple positions.
9Move the setup microphone to
position 2, use ui to select
“Measure”, and then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position
starts. Measurements can be made in up to
eight positions.
[3/6]
STEP3 Measurement
Please place the mic-
rophone at ear height
at 2nd listening
position.
Start next measurement. Test Tone will start
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
Measure
Next Calculation
MultEQ XT
If you want to omit measurements from the next
position onward, select “Next 1 Calculation”.
(Go to STEP4 Calculation )
10
Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3
to 8.
When measurement of position 8 is
completed, a “Measurements fi nished.”
message is displayed.
[3/6]
STEP3 Measurement
Measurements finished.
Proceed to Step 4 (Analyze)
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
Retry
Next Calculation
MultEQ XT
STEP 3
Measurement
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 10 2010/08/23 18:32:09
11
Basic version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Simple version
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
15
Unplug the setup microphone from
the unit’s SETUP MIC jack.
16
Set Dynamic Volume®.
[6/6]
Finish
Storing complete.
Auto Setup is now
finished. Please unplug
microphone.
Turn on Dynamic Volume?
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Exit
Turn Dynamic Volume on and exit Auto Setup
Yes No
MultEQ XT
• For details of Dynamic Volume settings, see
page 75.
nWhen turning Dynamic Volume on
Use o to select “Yes“, and then press ENTER.
• The unit automatically enters “Heavy” mode.
nWhen turning Dynamic Volume off
Use p to select “No“, and then press ENTER.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey Auto Setup, do not
change the speaker connections or subwoofer
volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
Finish
Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Auto Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If this happens,
check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again.
NOTE
Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
Caution!
No microphone or Speaker
Retry
Check cause of problem!
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• The connected setup microphone is broken, or a
device other than the supplied setup microphone is
connected.
• Not all speakers could be detected.
• The front L speaker was not properly detected.
• Connect the included setup microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
• Check the speaker connections.
Caution!
Ambient noise is too high
or Level is too low
Retry
Check cause of problem!
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• There is too much noise in the room for accurate
measurements to be made.
• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate
measurements to be made.
• Either turn off any device generating noise or move
it away.
• Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
• Check the speaker installation and the direction in
which the speakers are facing.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Caution!
Check cause of problem!
Retry
Front R None
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• The displayed speaker could not be detected. • Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Caution!
Check cause of problem!
Retry
Skip
Front L Phase
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• The displayed is connected with the polarities
reversed.
• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.
• For some speakers, this error message may be
displayed even if the speaker is properly connected.
If you are sure the connection is correct, press ui
to select “Skip”, then press ENTER.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 11 2010/08/23 18:32:09
12
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Play back disc 1 2 3 4 5
5
1Press BD two times in a row
to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
2Play the component connected to
this unit.
Make the necessary settings on the
player (language setting, subtitles
setting, etc.) beforehand.
3Adjust the sound volume.
VOLUME + ..................................... Volume up
VOLUME – ................................ Volume down
MUTE .................................................. Muting
4Set the listening mode.
Set the listening mode according to the playback contents
(cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking (vpage 44
“Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)”).
When power is switched to standby
Press STANDBY.
GPower indicator status in standby modeH
• Normal standby : Red
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” :
Orange
• When “Network Standby” is set to “ON” :
Orange
You can also switch the power to standby by
pressing ON/STANDBY on the main unit.
NOTE
During power standby, a minimal amount of power is consumed. To
totally cut off the power, remove the power cord from the power
outlet.
Parameter Check
This function enables you to check the measurement results and
equalizer characteristics after Audyssey Auto Setup.
1Use ui to select “Parameter Check” and then
press ENTER or p.
2Use ui to select the item you want to check, then
press ENTER or p.
Measurement results for each speaker are displayed.
Speaker Config Check
Distance Check
Channel Level Check
Crossover Check
EQ Check
Restore
AUTO SETUP
PARAMETER CHECK
Show speaker configuration result
Speaker Confi g. Check
Distance Check
Channel Level Check
Crossover Check
EQ Check
Check the speaker confi guration.
Check the distance.
Check the channel level.
Check the crossover frequency.
Check the equalizer.
• If “EQ Check” is selected in step 2, press ui to select equalizing
curve (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”) to be checked.
Use o p to switch the display between the different speakers.
3Press RETURN.
The confi rmation screen reappears. Repeat steps 2.
Retrieving Audyssey Auto Setup settings
If you set “Restore” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey Auto Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT)
even when you have changed each setting manually.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 12 2010/08/23 18:32:10
Basic
version
13
Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic versionSimple version
F Connections vpage14
F Playback (Basic operation) vpage25
F Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) vpage44
nRefer to the pages indicated below for information on connecting and playing back the various
media and external devices.
Audio and Video PlaybackConnection
TV vpage16, 17 –
Blu-ray Disc player vpage16, 17 vpage26
DVD player vpage16, 18 vpage26
Video cassette recorder vpage16, 19 –
Set-top box (Satellite tuner or cable TV) vpage16, 18 –
Game console vpage16 –
Digital camcorder vpage19 –
Audio PlaybackConnection
iPod®vpage20 vpage27
USB memory device vpage20 vpage28
CD player vpage20 vpage26
CD recorder vpage21 –
Record player vpage21 –
SIRIUS satellite radio vpage22 vpage30
HD Radio receiver vpage22 vpage32
Wireless receiver (RX101) vpage23 –
Network PlaybackConnection
Network vpage24 vpage34
For speaker connections, see page 5.
Basic version
Here, we explain the connections and basic operation methods for this unit.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 13 2010/08/23 18:32:10
14
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Important information
• Make connections as follows before using this unit. Select an appropriate connection type
according to the components to be connected.
• You may need to make some settings on this unit depending on the connection method. Refer to
each description for more information.
• Select the cables (sold separately) according to the components being connected.
NOTE
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components being
connected.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.
Converting input video signals for output
(Video conversion function)
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, Component video and video) and
three types of video output connectors (HDMI, Component video and video).
Use the connectors corresponding to the components to be connected.
This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to this unit into the formats used
to output the video signals from this unit to a monitor.
GFlow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
Video connector
Monitor
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector
HDMI connector
Video connector
HDMI connector
Video connector
Video device
This unit
Output
Input
(IN)
Output
(MONITOR OUT) Input
Connections
GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H
Component video
connectors
Video connector
Monitor
Component video
connectors
Video connector Video connector Video connector
Video device
This unit
Output
Input
(IN)
Output
(MONITOR OUT) Input
Component video
connectors (OUT2/ZONE2)
Component video
connectors
• Set when not using the video conversion function.
“Video Convert” (vpage70)
• Set when changing the resolution of the video signal.
“Resolution” (vpage70)
in Set as Necessary
• The video conversion function supports the NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC 4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60
formats.
• The resolution of the video signal input to this unit’s HDMI connector is the one set at “Resolution”
(vpage70). (1080p HDMI signals and 1080p component signals are output at 1080p, regardless of the
setting.)
• Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI
Monitor 2 Information” (vpage88).
NOTE
• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video
conversion function might not operate.
• Component video input signals cannot be converted into Video format.
• A menu is output via the HDMI connector or component video connector.
• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal output, set “Input Setup” – “Input
Assign” – “Component” (vpage69) in the menu to “ZONE2”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 14 2010/08/23 18:32:10
15
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Important information
Examples of screen display
• Menu screen • Status display screen
When the input source is
switched
When the volume is adjusted
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
MENU
Input Auto
STEREO
BD
Mode
Master Volume -80.0dB
Status display: The operating status appears briefly on the screen
when the input source is switched or the volume is
changed.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu
screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
You can connect up to six HDMI-compatible devices to the unit.
HDMI function
This unit supports the following HDMI functions:
• 3D
• Deep Color (vpage109)
• Auto Lip Sync (vpage80, 109)
• x.v.Color, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color (vpage109, 111)
• High definition digital audio format
• ARC (Audio Return Channel)
• Content Type
• CEC (HDMI control)
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both
this unit and TV or the player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of
data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP.
• If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read
the user guide of your television or player for more information.
About HDMI cables
• When a device supporting Deep Color signal transfer is connected, use a cable compatible “High Speed
HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
• When the ARC function is used, connect a device with a ”Standard HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High
Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” for HDMI 1.4a.
HDMI control function (vpage55)
This function allows you to operate external devices from this unit and operate this unit from external
devices.
NOTE
• The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings.
• You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control
function.
About 3D function
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of the HDMI 1.4a standards.
For playing the 3D video content, a player, and a TV that support the 3D function of the HDMI 1.4a
standards are required in addition to this unit.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu
screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function
The Audio Return Channel in HDMI 1.4a enables a TV, via a single HDMI cable, to send audio data “upstream”
to this unit.
NOTE
• To enable the ARC function, set “HDMI Control” to “ON” (vpage80).
• ARC function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order to use the ARC function, connect
the television to the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• When connecting a TV that does not support the ARC function, a separate connection using an audio
cable is required. In this case, refer to “Connecting a TV” (vpage17) for the connection method.
About Content Type
The HDMI specification version 1.4a enables simple, automated picture setting selection with no user
intervention.
NOTE
To enable the Content Type, set “Video Mode” to “Auto” (vpage70).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 15 2010/08/23 18:32:10
16
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
• When this unit is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, connect this unit and TV also with an
HDMI cable.
• When connecting a device that supports Deep Color transmission, please use a “High Speed HDMI
cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case,
switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
• When this unit and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with
HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
NOTE
• The HDMI signal is not simultaneously output to HDMI 1 and HDMI 2. Select
the connector that you want to use in advance using “Monitor Out” (vpage80)
in the menu, or by pressing the HDMI button on the remote control unit or the
HDMI OUT button on the main unit.
• HDMI control function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order
to use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the HDMI OUT 1
connector.
• The audio signal from the HDMI output connector (sampling frequency, number
of channels, etc.) may be limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the
connected device regarding permissible inputs.
• The front panel HDMI input connector is displayed as “HDMI6” in the “Input
Setup” – “Input Assign” (vpage68) in the menu.
Connecting to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector
When an HDMI/DVI conversion cable (sold separately) is used, the HDMI video signals are converted to
DVI signals, allowing connection to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector.
NOTE
• No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector. Make separate audio
connections.
• Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP.
• Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output.
nSettings related to HDMI connections
Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages.
Input Assign (vpage68)
Set this to change the HDMI input connector to which the input source is assigned.
HDMI Setup (vpage80)
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
• RGB Range • Auto Lip Sync • HDMI Audio Out • Monitor Out
• HDMI Control • Standby Source • Power Off Control
NOTE
The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
Cables used for connections
Audio and video cable (sold separately)
HDMI cable
• This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable.
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
HDMI
IN
HDMI
Blu-ray
Disc
player DVD
player TV 1
GRear panelH
Set-top
box
Video
cassette
recorder Game
console TV 2
GFront panelH
OUT
HDMI
Digital
camcorder
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 16 2010/08/23 18:32:12
17
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Connecting a TV
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For video connections, see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”
(vpage14).
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage15).
To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital connection.
NOTE
This connection is not required when a TV compatible with the ARC function (Audio Return Channel (HDMI
1.4a standard function) is connected to this unit via an HDMI connection.
For details, see “About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function” (vpage15) or refer to the instruction
manual for your TV.
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component video
cable
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Audio cable (sold separately)
Optical cable
IN
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PBPR
IN
TV
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player
• You can enjoy video and audio from a Blu-ray Disc.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component
video cable
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Audio cables (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PBPR
OUT
Blu-ray Disc player
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
For HD audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus and DTS Express) playback, connect with HDMI
(vpage15 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device”).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 17 2010/08/23 18:32:15
18
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connecting a DVD player
• You can enjoy video and audio from a DVD.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component
video cable
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Audio cables (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
Coaxial
digital cable (Black)
R
L
R
L
VIDEO AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PBPR
OUT OUT
COAXIAL
DVD player
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
• You can watch satellite or cable TV.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component
video cable
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Audio cables (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
Coaxial
digital cable (Black)
R
L
R
L
VIDEO AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PBPR
OUT OUT
COAXIAL
Satellite tuner/Cable TV
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 18 2010/08/23 18:32:19
19
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Connecting a video cassette recorder
• You can record video onto a video cassette tape.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-
compatible device” (vpage15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component
video cable
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
RL RL
OUT IN
AUDIOAUDIO VIDEOVIDEO
IN
AUDIOAUDIO
OUT
VIDEO VIDEOCOMPONENT VIDEO
Y PBPR
OUT
Video cassette recorder
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video
input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
NOTE
To record video signals through this unit, use the same type of video
cable for connection between this unit and the player as used for
connection between this unit and the recorder.
Connecting a digital camcorder
• You can enjoy video and audio from a digital camcorder.
• You can enjoy games by connecting a game machine via the AUX1
input connector. In this case, select the input source to “AUX1”.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-
compatible device” (vpage15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
Optical cable
R
L
R
L
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
RL
AUDIO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
Digital camcorder
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
The front panel OPTICAL input terminal is displayed as “OPT3” in the
“Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage68) in the menu.
NOTE
When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other
source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In
this case, use the monitor output of the same connector as the input.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 19 2010/08/23 18:32:22
20
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Supported iPod models
Made for
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone 3GS
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
You can enjoy music stored on an iPod or USB memory device.
Cables used for connections
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
USB
memory
device
iPod
or
Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate
or receive power. When using a portable USB connection type HDD
of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power,
use the AC adapter.
NOTE
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory
device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
Connecting a CD player
• You can enjoy CD sound.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
Optical cable
R
L
R
L
RL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
OPTICALAUDIO
CD player
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 20 2010/08/23 18:32:25
21
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Connecting a CD recorder
• You can record audio on a CD or cassette tape.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
Optical cable
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
RL RL
OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT IN
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIOAUDIO
CD recorder
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
To perform digital recording using the digital connector (OPT OUT), assign either one of the digital input
connectors to “CDR” by selecting “Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage68).
The above figure shows an example of changing the assignment of OPT1 connector to “CDR”.
Connecting a record player
You can enjoy playing records.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
GND
AUDIO
OUT
R
L
Turntable (MM cartridge)
• This unit is compatible with record players with an MM cartridge. When you connect to a record player
with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
• When you increase the volume without connecting the record player, there may be “booming” noise
from the speakers.
NOTE
The SIGNAL GND terminal of this unit is not a safety ground connection. Connect it to reduce noise when
noise is excessive. Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line may have the
reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 21 2010/08/23 18:32:27
22
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connecting an antenna
Connecting a SIRIUS connector
• This unit is a SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready® receiver. You can
receive SIRIUS® Satellite Radio by connecting to the SiriusConnect
Home Tuner and subscribing to the SIRIUS service.
• Plug the SIRIUS connector on the SIRIUS service.
• Position the Home Tuner antenna near a south-facing window to
receive the best signal.
For details, see “Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio” (vpage30).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions
of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner.
SiriusConnect Home Tuner
When
connecting
digital audio
When connecting digital of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner,
perform the setting “Digital”.
“Input Assign” (vpage68)
in Set as Necessary
NOTE
Keep the power cord unplugged until the SiriusConnect Home Tuner
connection have been completed.
nPositioning the antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be positioned
correctly. Use the following map to determine which area you are
in and position the antenna accordingly.
q
we
r
t
SOUTH
NORTH
WEST
SKY
EAST
HORIZON
Area 1 Point the antenna toward the sky in the east, northeast, or
southeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 2 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northeast,
either through a window or outside.
Area 3 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northwest,
either through a window or outside.
Area 4 Point the antenna toward the sky in the west, northwest, or
southwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 5 Put the antenna outside and point it straight up. The antenna
cannot be used indoors.
Connecting an HD Radio receiver
• By connecting a HD Radio antenna to this unit, you can receive
HD Radio programs.
• HD Radio broadcasting currentry is available in the United States and
select other countries.
w eq
FM outdoor
antenna
Direction of broadcasting station
75 Ω coaxial
cable
Ground AM outdoor
antenna
AM loop antenna
(for HD Radio broadcasting,
supplied)
• To prevent interference, install
at least 3.3 ft/1 m away from the
antenna connected to the this
unit’s other AM tuner terminal.
Black
White
FM indoor
antenna (for
HD Radio
broadcasting,
supplied)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 22 2010/08/23 18:32:31
23
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
nAM loop antenna assembly
1Put the stand section
through the bottom of the
loop antenna from the
rear and bend it forward.
Stand
Square
hole
Projecting
part
Loop
antenna
2Insert the projecting part
into the square hole in
the stand.
nUsing the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
NOTE
• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM
loop antenna.
• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal
parts of the panel.
• If the signal has noise interference, connect the ground terminal
(GND) to reduce noise.
• If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend
installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store
where you purchased the unit.
Connecting a wireless receiver
(RX101)
By connecting a wireless receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this unit,
you can receive and playback audio signals from other devices using
the Bluetooth Communication Function.
• Use a Bluetooth device that is A2DP compatible (vpage 109
“A2DP”).
• You can also use wireless receiver RX101 as an external IR receiver.
• For instructions on the wireless receiver settings, refer to the
RX101’s operating instructions.
Wireless receiver RX101
Bluetooth device
(A2DP Compatibility)
Remote control unit
You can enjoy listening to music by connecting a wireless receiver
via the M-XPort input connector. In this case, set the input source to
“M-XPort”.
NOTE
To use wireless receiver RX101 as external IR receiver, set the
remote sensor function of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage89
“Remote control settings”).
Connect a device that has a
multichannel output terminal
• You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-
channel sound audio output jacks to enjoy music and video.
• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc
player / DVD player (vpage17 “Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player”).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable (White)
(Red) R
L
R
L
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
SUB-
WOOFER
CENTER SURROUND
BACK
RL
SURROUND
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIO
Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player /
External decoder
To play analog signals input from 7.1CH INPUT terminals, set
“Input Mode” (vpage71) to “7.1CH IN”.
“7.1CH IN” can also be selected with A/D on the remote control
unit.
in Set as Necessary
When a device is connected to the SBL/SBR terminal of 7.1CH INPUT
terminals, set “Amp Assign” (vpage78) to “Normal”.
Connecting an antenna
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 23 2010/08/23 18:32:32
24
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
• This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files
stored on a computer and music content such as that from Internet
radio.
You can also operate this unit from a computer using the Web
control function.
• You can update by downloading the latest firmware from the
Marantz website.
For more information, on the menu, select “Firmware Update”
(vpage86).
• See “Network Setup” on the menu (vpage81) for more information
on network setting.
Cables used for connections
Cable (sold separately)
Ethernet
cable
Internet
To WAN side
Router
To LAN port
To LAN port LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
Computer
Modem
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or a computer shop.
Required system
nBroadband internet connection
nModem
Device that connects to the broadband circuit and conducts
communications on the Internet.
A type that is integrated with a router is also available.
nRouter
When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped
with the following functions:
• Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
nEthernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
• Use only shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is available at
retailer.
• Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.
We recommend using a normal type cable.
• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network
settings are made manually, make the settings at “Network Setup”
(vpage81).
• With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions
to make the network settings automatically.
• When using this unit with the broadband router’s DHCP function
enabled, this unit automatically performs the IP address setting and
other settings.
When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP
function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at “Network
Setup” (vpage81).
• When setting manually, check the setting contents with the network
administrator.
NOTE
• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband
connection to the Internet.
• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an
ISP or a computer shop for details.
• Marantz assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any
communication errors or troubles resulting from customer’s network
environment or connected devices.
• This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router
is required if you have a contract for a type of line set by PPPoE.
• Do not connect an NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port/
Ethernet connector on your computer.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 24 2010/08/23 18:32:33
25
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playback (Basic operation)
nPlaying a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
(vpage26)
nPlaying a CD player (vpage26)
nPlaying an iPod® (vpage27)
nPlaying a USB memory device (vpage28)
nTuning in radio stations (vpage30)
nPlaying a network audio (vpage34)
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
(vpage44)
nSelecting the input source (vpage25)
nAdjusting the master volume (vpage26)
nTurning off the sound temporarily (vpage26)
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage55)
Important information
Before starting playback, make the connections between the different
components and the settings on this unit.
NOTE
Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected components
when playing them.
Selecting the input source
Press the input source select button
(BD, DVD, VCR, SAT, GAME, AUX1,
NET/USB, TV, CD, CDR, SATR, TUNE,
M-XP) twice to play back that source.
The desired input source can be selected
directly.
You can also use the following operation to select an input
source.
• Select input source “PHONO” to play back music from a record
player connected to the PHONO input connector.
• Select the input source “PHONO” using one of the following
methods.
q “Source select ” menu (“Using the “Source Select” menu”
provided on the right)
w INPUT df on the remote control unit (“Operating the remote
control unit” provided on the right)
e INPUT SELECTOR knob on the main unit (“Operating the main
unit” provided on the right)
• Select input source “SIRIUS” with SATR button.
n Using the “Source Select” menu
q Press AMP and the press SOURCE SEL.
Display the “Source Select” menu.
Source Select :Flickr
Recent Source
Enter
Select
ENTER
The currently selected input
source is highlighted.
q
w
e
q Input Source
The name of the highlighted input source is displayed.
w Recently used sources
The recently used input sources (up to fi ve) are displayed.
e Icons for the input sources in the different categories are
displayed.
w Use uio p to select the input source,
then press ENTER.
The input source is set and the source
selection menu is turned off.
• When using with an iPod connected directly to the USB port of this
unit, select “ (NET/USB)” for the input source.
• Input sources that are not going to be used can be set ahead of time.
Make this setting at “Source Delete” (vpage84).
• To turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input
source, press SOURCE SEL again.
nUsing the button on the remote control unit
Press INPUT df.
• When INPUT df is pressed, the input
source is switched in the order shown
below.
BD DVD VCR SAT AUX1GAME NET/USB
M-XPort SIRIUS CDR CD TVHD Radio PHONO
nUsing the knob on the main unit
Turn INPUT SELECTOR.
• Turning INPUT SELECTOR switches
the input source, as shown below.
BD DVD VCR SAT AUX1GAME NET/USB
M-XPort SIRIUS CDR CD TVHD Radio PHONO
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 25 2010/08/23 18:32:34
26
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Adjusting the master volume
Use VOLUME to adjust the volume.
nWhen the “Volume Display” setting
(vpage84) is “Relative”
GAdjustable rangeH
– – – –80.5dB – 18.0dB
nWhen the “Volume Display” setting (vpage84) is
“Absolute”
GAdjustable rangeH 0.0 – 99.0
• The adjustable range may vary depending on input signal and
channel level settings.
You can also operate via the main unit.
In this case, perform the following
operations.
Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE.
• The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage84).
• To cancel, press MUTE again. Muting can also be canceled by
adjusting the master volume.
Set the front speakers to be used
Press SPKR A/B.
• Each time you press SPKR A/B, the front
speaker setting will change as follows.
Front A Front A+BFront B
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD
player
The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/
DVD player.
1Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the TV,
subwoofer and player.
w Change the TV input to the input of
this unit.
e Load the disc in the player.
2Press ON to turn on power to the
unit.
3Press BD or DVD twice to switch
the input source for the player
used for playback.
4Play the component connected to this unit.
Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting,
subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.
Playing a CD player
The following describes the procedure for playing CD player.
1Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the subwoofer
and player.
w Load the disc in the player.
2Press ON to turn on power to the
unit.
3Press CD twice to switch the input
source to the CD player.
4Play the component connected to
this unit.
Important information
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 26 2010/08/23 18:32:35
27
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playing an iPod®
You can play back both video, photo and audio.
1Connect the iPod® to the USB
port (vpage 20 “Connecting an
iPod or USB memory device to
the USB port”).
2Press ON to turn on power to the
unit.
3Press NET/USB twice to switch
the input source to “NET/USB”.
Favorite
Internet Radio
Media Server
iPod
[1/8]
Flickr
Napster
Pandora
4Use ui to select “iPod”, then
press ENTER or p.
iPod
Playlists
Artists
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Albums
Songs
[1/8]
SEARCH Search
NOTE
If the connections screen is not displayed, the iPod may not be
properly connected. Reconnect it.
5Press SEARCH/INFO and hold it down for 2 seconds
or more to select the display mode.
• There are two modes for displaying the contents recorded on the
iPod.
Remote mode Display iPod information on the TV screen.
• The unit display shows single-byte
alphanumeric characters and some
symbols only. “.” is displayed in place
of incompatible characters.
• In ”Remote mode”, the iPod display is
as shown at right. OK to disconnect.
Direct mode Display iPod information on the iPod screen.
• “Direct iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
Display mode Remote mode Direct mode
Playable
fi les
Music fi le P P
Video fi le z
Active
buttons
Remote
control unit
(This unit)
P P
iPod®P
zOnly the sound is played.
6Use ui to select the item, then press ENTER or p
to select the le to be played.
7Press ENTER, p or 1.
Playback starts.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage85). Press uio p
to return to the original screen.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• In Remote mode, press STATUS during
playback to check the title name, artist
name, and album name.
NOTE
• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in
conjunction with the iPod.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 27 2010/08/23 18:32:36
28
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playing a USB memory device
Playing back music or still picture (JPEG) files recorded on a USB
memory device.
Important information
nUSB memory devices
A USB memory device can be connected to the USB port of this
unit to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB
memory device.
Also, files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is
connected directly to the USB port of this unit. See “Connecting
an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port” (vpage20).
• Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on this
unit.
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
Album art function
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be
displayed while playing the file.
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be played
as slide shows.
The duration each picture is displayed can be set.
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they
are stored in the folder.
GCompatible formatsH
USB memory devices z1
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Pz2
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) P
WAV P
MPEG-4 AAC Pz3
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) P
JPEG P
z1 USB
• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using
MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.
z2 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable
players compatible with MTP.
z3 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on
this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright
protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from
a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending
on the computer’s settings.
GCompatible formatsH
Sampling
frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows
Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz – .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96 kHz – .flac
Playing an iPod®
niPod operation
Operation buttons Function
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui) /
Manual search (Press and hold, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH
(Press and release) Page searchz1 / Character searchz2
SEARCH
(Press and hold) Remote / Direct mode switching
RETURN Return
6 7
(Press and hold)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1Playback / Pause
8 9 Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
REPEAT Repeat playback
RANDOM Random playback
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO.
• Repeat playback and shuffle playback can also
be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”
(vpage71) in the menu.
• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be
able to perform a character search.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 28 2010/08/23 18:32:36
29
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playing a USB memory device
Playing fi les stored on USB memory
devices
1Connect the USB memory device
to the USB port (vpage 20
“Connecting an iPod or USB
memory device to the USB port”).
2Press NET/USB twice to switch
the input source to “NET/USB”.
favorite
Internet Radio
Media Server
USB
[1/8]
Flickr
Napster
Pandora
3Press ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.
USB
D&M1
D&M2
Music2.mp3
Music3.m4a
Music4.m4a
D&M3
Music1.mp4
[1/7]
• Selecting in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select
“USB”.
4Press ui to select the search item or folder, then
press ENTER or p.
5Press ui to select the le, then press ENTER, p or
1.
Playback starts.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage85). Press uio p
to return to the original screen.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the
top partition can be selected.
• This unit is compatible with MP3 fi les conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3” standards.
NOTE
• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using
this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will
operate or be supplied power. When using a USB portable hard disk
that can draw power from an AC adapter, we recommend using the
AC adapter.
• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the USB port of
this unit using a USB cable.
n USB operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Page searchz1 / Character searchz2
RETURN Return
1Playback / Pause
8 9 Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
REPEAT Repeat playback
RANDOM Random playback
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the fi rst letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO.
• Repeat playback and shuffl e playback can also
be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”
(vpage71) in the menu.
• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be
able to perform a character search.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 29 2010/08/23 18:32:36
30
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio
1Press SATR twice to switch the
input source to “SIRIUS”.
2Use TUNING + or TUNING – to
select the channel.
When the channel is tuned in, the name
of the song and artist are displayed.
• The channel switches continuously when TUNING + or TUNING – is
pressed and held.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage85). Press uio p to
return to the original screen.
• The song title, artist name, composer
name, category and reception level can
be checked by pressing STATUS.
Tuning in radio stations
Important information
nAbout SIRIUS XM radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS
or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready
receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from
categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz,
Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional
and college sports including play by play games from select
leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming,
local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to
activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow
installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite
tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of
programming packages available, including the option of adding
“The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best
of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy
the most popular programming among both services. The “Best
of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers
at this time.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels
featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com
or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers
should visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR
(1-877-438- 9677).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can
call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or
siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
nSIRIUS XM radio legal
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and
XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation
fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each
sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite
radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is
prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or
software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or
XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
nUsing the HD Radio™ receiver
HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional
FM/ AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and
select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
HD Radio Technology provides higher quality sound than
conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
• FM sounds as sensational as CDs
• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo
• A variety of “data services”, including text-based information,
song title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.
Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with
HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8
multicast programs.
For detailed information on HD Radio Technology, please go to
“www. hdradio.com”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 30 2010/08/23 18:32:37
31
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Tuning in radio stations
nChecking the SIRIUS signal strength and radio
ID
1Press STATUS until
“SIGNAL” appears on the
display.
The display will switch as
shown below, depending on the
reception conditions.
Display Status
EXCELLENT Signal strength is excellent
GOOD Signal strength is good
WEAK Signal strength is weak
NO SIGNAL No signal
2Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:
EXCELLENT” is shown on the display.
3Press STATUS until the channel (example: “SR001”)
is displayed.
4Press TUNING + or TUNING –
and select channel 0 (SR000).
Channel No. and Sirius ID are alternately
shown on the display.
SR000 SiriusID
************
Sirius ID
• Write your own SIRIUS ID for storage use.
Sirius ID :
The strength of both the SIRIUS satellite and terrestrial signals can be
checked “Antenna Aiming” (vpage68).
nPresetting radio channels (Preset memory)
Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can
tune them in easily. Up to 56 channels can be preset.
1Tune in the broadcast channel
you want to preset.
2Press MEMORY.
3Press SHIFT to select the block
(A to G) in which to preset the
channel (1 to 8 per block), then
press PRESET +, PRESET – or 1 –
8 to select the preset number.
4Press MEMORY again to complete
the setting.
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to
4.
NOTE
Preset channels are erased by overwriting them.
nListening to preset channels
Press PRESET +, PRESET – to select
the desired preset channel, then press
ENTER.
• Preset channels can also be selected by
pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU (Block) and 1 –
8 (Channel).
You can also operate via the main unit. In this
case, perform the following operations.
Press o p to select the preset radio channel.
nSearching categories
1Press o p.
SR001 Hits 1
CAT : Pops
Channel category
2Use o p to select the category, to use ui to select
the desired channel.
nAccessing SIRIUS satellite radio channels
directly
1Press SEARCH/INFO.
2Press 0 – 9 to input the channel.
Example: Accessing channel “SR123”:
Press 1, 2 and 3.
• If no button is pressed within several
seconds, the channel automatically
switches to the one whose number has
been input.
3Press ENTER to set that channel.
Reception switches to the selected
channel.
• “UPDATING” is displayed while the encording code is being
updated.
• “SIRIUS UPDATING” is displayed when updating SIRIUS tuner
firmware.
• Refer to “Troubleshooting” – “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (vpage113)
regarding other messages.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 31 2010/08/23 18:32:37
32
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
nParental Lock
1Tune to the channel you want to
lock.
2Press ENTER for at least 3
seconds.
“Enter Lock Code” is displayed.
3Enter the 4-digit lock code using
uio p or 0 – 9.
When you enter the correct code, the
corresponding channel is locked.
4Press ENTER.
• Channels under Parental Lock cannot be tuned in by performing
channel up/down or by category search.
• Channels stored in preset memory can be tuned in by the preset
channel select operation, even if Parental Lock is applied.
• When a channel to which Parental Lock is applied is being played,
Parental Lock for that channel is cancelled by performing step 2.
• See “Edit Lock Cord” (vpage 68) for the method of changing
Parental Lock Cord.
• You can also set “Parental Lock” (vpage67) from the menu.
nSIRIUS operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation / Category search
ENTER
(Press and hold) To parental lock password check screen
SEARCH Direct search
RETURN Return
TUNING +, – Channel selection
0 – 9 Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY Preset memory registration
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Tuning in radio stations
Listening to HD Radio stations
1Press TUNE twice to switch the
input source to “HD Radio”.
2Press BAND to select “FM” or
“AM”.
FM When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM When listening to an AM broadcast.
3Tune in the desired broadcast
station.
q To tune in automatically (Auto tuning)
Press T.MODE to light the “HD-AUTO”
or “AUTO” indicator on the display, then
use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the
station you want to hear.
• The indicator lights on the display
when an HD Radio station is tuned in.
• When “HD-AUTO” (tuning mode) is
selected, only HD Radio stations are
tuned in.
• If “AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog
stations are tuned in.
w To tune in manually (Manual tuning)
Press T.MODE to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then
use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the station you want to
hear.
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold TUNING + or
TUNING – to change frequencies continuously.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage85). Press uio p to
return to the original screen.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 32 2010/08/23 18:32:38
33
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Tuning in radio stations
nDirect frequency tuning
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1Press SEARCH/INFO.
2Input frequencies using the 0 – 9.
• If o is pressed, the immediately preceding
input is cancelled.
3When setting is completed, press
ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
nCheck the HD Radio reception information
Press STATUS while an HD Radio
broadcast is being received.
The current reception information is
shown on the display.
q Normal
w Frequency / Signal strength
e Station name / Program and Program type
r Title name / Artist name
t Album name / Genre name
NOTE
If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while
and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the
analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the indicator and text may flicker if the station
signal level is weak and unstable.
nSelecting audio programs
HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio
Program and data services on HD2 / HD3 / HD4 channels.
Press ui to select the audio
program.
If the station you are listening to has multiple
audio programs, “HD1” is indicated on the
display. If it only has one audio program,
“HD” is indicated.
nPresetting radio stations (Manual preset)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune
them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
• Stations can be preset automatically at “Auto Preset” (vpage67).
If “Auto Preset” is performed after performing “Manual Preset”, the
“Manual Preset” settings will be overwritten.
1Tune in the broadcast station you
want to preset.
2Press MEMORY.
3Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select
the block (A to G) in which to
preset the channel (1 to 8 per
block), then press PRESET +,
PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select the
preset number.
4Press MEMORY again to complete
the setting.
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to
4.
Default settings
Block (A – G)
and
Channel (1 – 8)
Default Settings
A1 – A8 87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /
100.1 MHz
B1 – B8 101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /
90.1 / 90.1 MHz
C1 – C8 530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 /
1710 kHz
D1 – D8 90.1 MHz
E1 – E8 90.1 MHz
F1 – F8 90.1 MHz
G1 – G8 90.1 MHz
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station
(Preset Name) (vpage68)
Listening to preset stations
1Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select
the memory block (A to G).
2Press PRESET +, PRESET – or
1 – 8 to select the desired preset
channel.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this
case, perform the following operations.
Press o p to select the preset radio station.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 33 2010/08/23 18:32:38
34
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a media server can be
played as slide shows. The duration each picture is displayed can be
set.
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they
are stored in the folder.
GCompatible formatsH
Internet radio Media server z1
WMA (Windows
Media Audio) P P
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3) P P
WAV P
MPEG-4 AAC Pz2
FLAC (Free Lossless
Audio Codec) P
JPEG P
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the
corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
z1 Media server
• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using
MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.
z2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on
this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright
protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from
a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending
on the computer’s settings.
Playing a network audio
Follow this procedure to play Internet radio stations or music or still
picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer.
Important information
nAbout the internet radio function
• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the
Internet.
Internet radio stations from around the world can be received.
• This unit is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:
• Stations can be selected by genre and region.
• Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
• Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) format can be listened to.
• Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an
exclusive Marantz Internet radio URL from a Web browser on
a computer.
• The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide
your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiomarantz.com
• The radio station database service may be suspended without
notice.
• This unit’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio
station database service (vTuner). This database service provides
a list edited and created for this unit.
nMedia player
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl)
stored on a computer (media server) connected to this unit via a
network.
With this unit’s network audio playback function, connection to the
server is possible using one of the technologies below.
• Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
• Windows Media DRM10
Album art function
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file
includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the
music files are playing.
For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art
is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.
nTuner (HD Radio reception) operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation /
Multicast switching (ui)
ENTER Enter
SEARCH Direct frequency tuning
RETURN Return
BAND FM/AM switching
T.MODE Switch search modes
TUNING +, – Tuning (up/down)
0 – 9 Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY Preset memory registration
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Tuning in radio stations
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 34 2010/08/23 18:32:39
35
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
GCompatible formatsH
Sampling
frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows
Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz – .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96 kHz – .fl ac
n About Flickr
Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004.
You can use the this unit to view photographs that have been made
public by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr.
To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an
account in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.
For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.fl ickr.com/
n About Napster
Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service
provided by Napster LLC. This service allows users to download
and play pieces of music they want to hear on this unit. Before
you can use Napster, you will need to visit the Napster website on
your PC to create an account and register as a member. For details,
access the following site:
http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
n About Pandora
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet
radio service created by the Music Genome Project.
When you fi rst listen to Pandora, it is necessary to subscribe to a
Pandora account at the Pandora homepage by your PC and register
this machine. See the Pandora homepage for details.
http://www.pandora.com/marantz
n About Rhapsody
Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks.
When you fi rst listen to Rhapsody, it is necessary to subscribe to
a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage by your PC and
register this machine. See the Rhapsody homepage for details.
http://www.rhapsody.com/marantz
Playing a network audio
Listening to internet radio
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment,
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage81).
2Press NET/USB twice to switch
the input source to “NET/USB”.
3Press ui to select “Internet
Radio”, then press ENTER or p.
• Selecting in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select
“Internet Radio”.
4Press ui to select the item you want to play, then
press ENTER or p.
5Repeat step 4 until the station list is displayed.
The station list is displayed.
6Press ui to select the station, then press ENTER or
p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the
quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the
tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffi c, the music
or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower
bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound
to be interrupted.
• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is
busy or not broadcasting.
• On this unit, folder and fi le names can be displayed as titles. Any
characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vvpage85. Press uio
p to return to the original screen.
• When STATUS is pressed, the display
can be switched between the title
name and radio station name.
nRecently played internet radio stations
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from
“Recently Played”.
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
1Press ui to select “Recently
Played”, then press ENTER or p.
2Press ui to select the item you
want to play, then press ENTER or
p.
nSearching stations by keyword
(Alphabetic strings)
1Press ui to select “Search by Keyword”, then press
ENTER or p.
Enter Station
Search by Keyword
SubmitInput
SEARCH Keyboard INSERT Insert DELETE Delete
RETURN Cancel
• For character input, see page 65.
2Input the characters, then press ENTER.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 35 2010/08/23 18:32:39
36
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
nPresetting internet radio stations
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
1While the Internet radio station
you want to preset is playing,
press MEMORY.
2Press ui to select “Preset”,
then press ENTER.
3Press SHIFT/TOP MENU, then
press PRESET +, PRESET – or
1 – 8 to select the desired preset
number.
4Press MEMORY again to complete
the setting.
The Internet radio station is now preset.
NOTE
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously
registered setting is cleared.
nListening to preset internet radio stations
After pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU, press
PRESET +, PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select
the registered preset number.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
n Registering internet radio stations as your
favorites
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a
station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.
1Press MEMORY while the Internet
radio station you want to register
is playing.
2Press ui to select “Favorites”,
then press ENTER.
3Press o to select “Add”.
The Internet radio station is registered.
• If you do not want to register the station,
press p.
nListening to internet radio stations registered in
your favorites
1Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
2Press NET/USB and then press
ui to select the Internet radio
station, then press ENTER or p.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
nClearing internet radio stations from your
favorites
1Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
2Press NET/USB and then press
ui to select the Internet radio
station you want to clear, then
press MEMORY.
3Press o to select “Remove”.
The selected Internet radio station is cleared.
• To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.
n Internet radio operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Page searchz1 / Character searchz2
RETURN Return
2Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY Favorites / Preset memory registration
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the fi rst letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may
not be able to perform a character search.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 36 2010/08/23 18:32:40
37
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playing a network audio
Playing files stored on a computer
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment,
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage81).
e Prepare the computer
(vComputer’s operating
instructions).
2Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
3Press NET/USB and then use ui to select the server
including the le to be played, then press ENTER or
p.
4Use ui to select the search item or folder, then
press ENTER or p.
5Repeat step 4 until the le is displayed.
6Press ui to select the le, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
• Connections to the required system and specific settings must be
made in order to play music files (vpage24).
• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software
and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating
instructions of your server software.
• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
• The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on
the server specifications. If the tracks/ files are not displayed in
alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the
first letter may not work properly.
• WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting
transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage85). Press uio p
to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between
displaying the title name, artist name
or album name.
nPlaying files that have been preset or registered
in your favorites
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using
the same operations as for Internet radio stations (vpage36).
NOTE
• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
• When the operations described below is performed, the media
server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to
play preset or favorite music files.
• When you quit the media server and then restart it.
• When music files are deleted or added on the media server.
• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server
name.
nMedia server operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Page searchz1 / Character searchz2
RETURN Return
1Playback / Pause
8 9 Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY Favorites / Preset memory registration
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
• Repeat playback (vpage71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage71 “Random”)
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or
p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select
the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may
not be able to perform a character search.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 37 2010/08/23 18:32:40
38
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
nViewing photographs shared by particular users
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment,
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage81).
2Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
Flickr
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
[1/2]
3Press NET/USB and then use ui to select “Add
Flickr Contact”, then press ENTER or p.
4Enter “Username”.
• For character input, see page 65.
5After inputting the “Username”, then press ENTER.
The “Username” entered in step 4 is displayed.
• If the Username you typed in cannot be found, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” appears. Check and type in the
correct Username.
6Press ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
or p.
Favorites Displays the favorite photographs of the specifi ed
user.
Photostream Displays a list of shared photographs.
PhotoSets Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts Displays a Username registered for Flickr Contact by
a particular user.
Remove this
Contact
Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
7Press ui to select the le, and then press ENTER
or p.
The selected fi le is displayed.
nViewing all photographs on Flickr
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment,
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage81).
2Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
Flickr
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
[1/2]
3Press NET/USB and then use ui to select “All
Content”, then press ENTER or p.
4Press ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
or p.
Interestingness Displays photographs that are popular from the
number of user comments or number of times they
are added as favorites.
Recent Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text Search for photographs by keyword.
5Press ui to select the le, and then press ENTER
or p.
The selected fi le is displayed.
NOTE
Depending on the fi le format, some photographs cannot be viewed.
nFlickr operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Page Searchz
RETURN Return
2Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO, then press o (previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 38 2010/08/23 18:32:41
39
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playing a network audio
Listening to Napster
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment,
then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage24 “Connecting to a home
network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage81).
2Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
3Press NET/USB and then use ui p to input
“Username” and “Password”.
Napster Account
OK
Enter Username
Username
Password
RETURN Cancel
• For character input, see page 65.
4After inputting the “Username” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Napster is displayed.
NOTE
• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
nSearching from Napster menu
1Use ui to select search item or
folder, then press ENTER or p.
2Repeat step 1 until the track is
displayed.
3Use ui to select the track item, then press ENTER
or p.
nEntering a character search for the track you
want to listen to
1Press SEARCH/INFO.
My Napster Library
Top 100s
New Releases
Radio
Napster Playlists
E
Staff Picks
[1/8]
Napster
Search by Artist
Search by Albums
Search by Track
• You can search by artist name, album name or track name.
2Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER.
The search display appears.
Enter Artist Name
Search by Artist
SubmitInput
SEARCH Keyboard INSERT Insert DELETE Delete
RETURN Cancel
• For character input, see page 65.
3Input the characters, then press ENTER.
nRegistering tracks in my Napster library
1Press p while the track you wish
to register is playing.
2Select “Add to my library”, then
press ENTER or p.
The track is entered in the Library.
Listening to tracks registered in my Napster library
1Use ui to select “My Napster
Library”, then press ENTER or
p.
2Use ui to select the information
or track, then press ENTER.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage85). Press uio p
to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between
displaying the title name, artist name or
album name.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 39 2010/08/23 18:32:41
40
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
nNapster operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Search menu / Page searchz
RETURN Return
1Playback / Pause
8 9 Auto search (cue)
2Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
• Repeat playback (vpage71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage71 “Random”)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o (previous
page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO.
Listening to Pandora
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage81).
2Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
Then press NET/USB.
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
I am new to Pandora
Enter RETURN Cancel
• If you do not have a Pandora account, press i to select “I am
new to Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are
displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and register
the displayed activation code and account information. Then press
ENTER.
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
Please got to
http://www.pandora.com/marantz and follow
the instructions there to create a new account.
Your aactivation code is
4DA2C67B
I am new to Pandora
Continue RETURN Cancel
3If you have a Pandora account, press ui to select
“I have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER or p.
Pandora Account
OK
Enter Email address
Email address
Password
RETURN Cancel
4Input “Email address” and “Password”.
• For character input, see page 65.
5After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
NOTE
Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed,
select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 40 2010/08/23 18:32:42
41
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playing a network audio
nCreating an original radio station
You can create up to 100 original radio stations.
1Use ui to select “New Station”,
then press ENTER or p.
My Station
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
[1/3]
RETURN Sign out
Exit
2Input a “Track Name” or “Artist Name”, then press
ENTER.
• For character input, see page 65.
3Use ui to select “Search by artist” or “Search by
track”, then press ENTER.
You can search and display a list by track or artist.
4Press ui, select a le (e.g. D&M2) from the list,
and press ENTER or p.
Selected fi le is played back.
“Radio” is added to the end of a fi lename, and your original
radio station is created (e.g. D&M2 Radio).
My Station
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
D&M2 Radio
[1/4]
RETURN Sign out
Exit
nListening to a created radio station
Listening to a created radio station
(e.g. D&M2 Radio)
By specifying your favorite track or artist name, music that has a
similar rhythm or sound is chosen and streamed.
Press ui and select the radio station
(“D&M2 Radio”) that you want to
listen to, and press ENTER or p.
In Pandora, you can search for the track name
or artist name using “D&M2” as a keyword.
When the search is complete, tracks that
have a similar rhythm or sound are streamed.
D&M2 Radio
00:15
100%
Song
Artist
Album
Pause Skip Select
Menu
Now Playing
MP3 128kbps
Listening to created radio stations at random
Use ui to select “Quick Mix”, then
press ENTER or p.
Created radio stations are selected at
random, and tracks are streamed.
nArranging tracks within radio stations
You can sort tracks by operating the Pandora menu screen while
a track is playing.
Press p while a track is playing.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed.
Menu
I like this track
i don’t like this track
Bookmark this track
I’m tired of this track
Delete this station
Why is this track playing?
Create station
[1/7]
I like this track • Press when you like the track that is being played.
• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs
up) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed on
the next track.)
I don’t like
this track
• Press when you don’t like the track that is being
played.
• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs
down) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed
on the next track.)
Why is this
track playing?
• Displays the reason why Pandora selected this
track.
Create station • Creates a Station for the Track or Artist being
played.
Bookmark
this track
• Bookmarks the track currently being played.
• You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
• For details, see the Pandora web page.
I’m tired of
this track
• Press when you don’t like the track that is being
played.
• The track will not be played for 1 month.
Delete this
station
• Press when you want to delete the station that is
being played.
NOTE
• You can Skip up to 6 Tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.
• You can create up to 100 New Stations (radio stations).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 41 2010/08/23 18:32:43
42
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
nSign out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
1While the Pandora top menu is
displayed, press RETURN.
My Station
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
D&M2 Radio
[1/4]
RETURN Sign out
Exit
2When the popup menu appears, press o p to select
“Yes”.
nPandora operation
Operation buttons Function
uio pCursor operation /
Auto search (cue, i)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Page searchz
RETURN Return
1Playback
9Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o (previous page) or p (next
page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
Playing a network audio
Listening to Rhapsody
1Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage81).
2Press AMP and then press SOURCE SEL to display
the Source Select menu, then select (vpage 25).
Then press NET/USB.
3Use ui to select “Sign in to
your account”, then press ENTER
or p.
Rhapsody
Start a 30-day trial
Sign in to your account
Enter RETURN Cancel
4Input Username and Password.
Rhapsody Account Sign In
OK
Enter Username
Username
Password
RETURN Cancel
• For character input, see page 65.
5After inputting the “Username” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Rhapsody is displayed.
NOTE
• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
nSelect the search mode
Rhapsody
Rhapsody Music Guide
Search
Rhapsody Channels
My Library
[1/4]
q
w
e
r
q Search from Rhapsody latest information
1Use ui to select “Rhapsody
Music Guide”, then press ENTER
or p.
2Press ui to select the
information for track selection,
then press ENTER or p.
• For character input, see page 65.
3Repeat step 2 until the track is displayed.
4Use ui to select the track, then press ENTER or p.
w Enter a character search for the track you want
to listen to
1Use ui to select “Search”, then
press ENTER or p.
2Use ui to select the search item,
then press ENTER or p.
The search display appears.
• You can search by artist name, album name,
track name or keyword.
3Enter the characters, then press ENTER.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 42 2010/08/23 18:32:43
43
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Playing a network audio
e Search from the Rhapsody internet radio station
1Use ui to select “Rhapsody
Channels”, then press ENTER or
p.
2Repeat step 1 until the radio
station is displayed.
3Use ui to select radio station, then press ENTER
or p.
The search display appears.
r Listening to tracks registered in my library
1Use ui to select “My Library”,
then press ENTER or p.
2Repeat step 1 until the track is
displayed.
3Use ui to select the information or track, then
press ENTER or p.
After selecting, the information is displayed
nTrack menu
Press p during playback to display
the track menu.
Introduction
Jamp to artist
Jamp to album
Similar artists
Similar albums
Add to my library
Rating
[1/6]
q
w
e
q Search from the similar music
Use ui to select the search item,
then press ENTER or p.
w Registering tracks in my library
Use ui to select “Add to my
library”, then press ENTER or p.
The track is entered in the library.
e Rating function
1Use ui to select “Rating”, then
press ENTER or p.
2Use o p to select the rating, then
press ENTER.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage85). Press uio p
to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between
displaying the title name, artist name or
album name.
n Rhapsody operation
Operation buttons Function
PRESET +, – Preset channel selection
uio pCursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release) Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop
SEARCH Page searchz1 / Character searchz2
RETURN Return
1Playback / Pause
8 9 Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
• Repeat playback (vpage71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage71 “Random”)
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o (previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH twice, then press o p to select the
fi rst letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted
list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may
not be able to perform a character search.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 43 2010/08/23 18:32:45
44
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Multi-channel playback
nSurround playback of 2-channel sources
1
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2Press SURR. to select the
surround decoder to play back
multichannel sound.
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
• Each time SURR. is pressed, the surround
mode is switched.
Which decoder can be selected depends on
the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage78)
or “Speaker Config.” (vpage78).
DOLBY PLgz z1This mode is for 7.1-channel surround playback
using the front height speakers.
• “PLgz Height” is displayed.
DOLBY PLgx z2This mode is for 7.1-channel or 6.1-channel
surround playback using the surround back
speakers.
• “PLgx Movie”, “PLgx Music” or “PLgx Game”
is displayed.
DOLBY PLgThis mode is for 5.1-channel surround playback.
Select this mode if no front height speaker nor
surround back speaker is to be used.
• “PLg Movie”, “PLg Music”, “PLg Game” is
displayed.
DTS NEO:6 This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or
5.1-channel surround playback using the surround
back speakers.
• “DTS NEO:6 Cinema” or “DTS NEO:6 Music” is
displayed.
MULTI CH
STEREO
This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all
speakers.
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
This unit can play input audio signals in multi-channel surround mode or in stereo mode.
Select a listening mode suitable for the playback contents (cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking.
Listening mode
Input audio
signal Playback Listening mode
2-channel
Multi channel
Surround Multi-channel
playback (vpage44)
For 2-channel signal input:
• Surround-channel signals are created and played with surround playback.
For multichannel signal input:
• The surround signal recorded in source is played as surround playback.
(The sound is played according to the settings of the speaker size in
“Speaker Config.” (vpage78).)
• Surround-back-channel or front-height-channel signals that are not
recorded in source can be created.
2-channel
Multi channel
Stereo Stereo playback
(vpage46)
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio
and are played.
• Subwoofer signals are also output.
2-channel
Multi channel
Stereo
Surround
Direct playback
(vpage46)
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
• Tone (vpage73) • MultEQ® XT (vpage74)
• Dynamic EQ® (vpage74) • Dynamic Volume® (vpage75)
• M-DAX (vpage76)
2-channel
Multi channel
Virtual
Surround
Dolby Virtual Speaker/
Dolby Headphone
playback (vpage46)
Virtual Surround processing is performed on 2-channel or multichannel
input signals that are played back.
• Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal.
For details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround modes” (vpage106).
• Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” (vpage73) to enjoy your favorite sound mode.
• You can select the listening mode by pressing SURROUND MODE on the main unit.
Press SURROUND MODE and the modes are switched as shown below.
DOLBY VS
DOLBY PLg(x) Music
NEURAL
DOLBY PLg(x) Game
AUTO*(STEREO) STEREO DOLBY PLgz DOLBY PLg(x) Movie
MULTI CH STEREO DTS NEO:6 cinema
DTS NEO:6 music
zFor “AUTO”, press AUTO on the amplifier or remote control unit.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 44 2010/08/23 18:32:45
45
Simple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Basic version
Multi-channel playback
Displaying the currently playing surround mode
Input signal Surround mode Display
DOLBY DIGITAL
(2ch) NEURAL NEURAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
(other than 2ch) /
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Movie DOLBY D + PL x MV
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music DOLBY D + PL x MS
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgzDOLBY D PL z
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY DIGITAL +
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX DOLBY D + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx
Movie DOLBY D + PL x MV
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx
Music DOLBY D + PL x MS
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
+ PLgz DOLBY D + PL z
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD + EX DOLBY HD EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Movie DOLBY HD +PL x MV
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music DOLBY HD +PL x MS
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgzDOLBY HD PL z
DTS (5.1ch) /
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 /
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 /
DTS 96/24
DTS SURROUND DTS SURROUND
DTS + PLgx Movie DTS PL x MV
DTS + PLgx Music DTS PL x MS
DTS + PLgz HEIGHT DTS PL z
DTS + NEO:6 DTS NEO:6
DTS ES MTRX6.1z1DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS ES DSCRT6.1z2DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS 96/24z3DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS-HD HI RES DTS-HD HI RES
DTS-HD MSTR DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD + NEO:6 DTS-HD NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx MOVIE DTS-HD PL x MV
DTS-HD + PLgx MUSIC DTS-HD PL x MS
DTS-HD + PLgz HEIGHT DTS-HD PL z
DTS Express DTS Express
PCM (multi ch)
MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN
MULTI IN + Dolby EX MULTI Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx MOVIE MULTI IN PL x MV
MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC MULTI IN PL x MS
MULTI IN + PLgz HEIGHT MULTI IN PL z
MULTI CH IN 7.1 MULTI CH IN 7.1
All Input signal Dolby VIRTUAL SPEAKER DOLBY VS
All signals indicated
above Audyssey DSXz4Audyssey DSX
z1 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”.
z2 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.
z3 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS 96/24”.
z4 This surround mode is displayed when
“Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to
“ON–Height–” or “ON-–Wide–”.
GViews on the displayH
q w
q Shows a decoder to be used.
• A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed
as “DOLBY D +”.
w Shows a decoder that creates sound output
from the surround back speakers.
• “+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound
from front height speakers.
For an input signal that can be reproduced in
each surround mode, see “Surround modes and
parameters” (vpage104).
NEURAL z3This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or
5.1-channel surround playback using the surround
back speakers.
• “NEURAL” is displayed.
z1 This can be selected when the “Amp Assign” (vpage78)
setting in the menu is set to “Normal” is set to “A”.
z2 This can be selected when “Amp Assign” is set to “Normal” or
“Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” is not set to “None”.
z3 This mode supports analog 2-channel audio, and linear PCM 2
channel (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) audio.
GViews on the displayH
q w
q Shows a decoder to be
used.
w Shows Audyssey
DSX™ processing.
nSurround playback of multi-channel sources
(Dolby Digital, DTS etc.)
1
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2Press SURR. to select the
surround decoder to play back
multichannel sound.
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
• Select the surround mode while viewing
the display on the screen (v“Displaying
the currently playing surround mode” at
right).
• Which decoder can be selected depends on the input signal,
the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage78) or “Speaker Config.”
(vpage78).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 45 2010/08/23 18:32:46
46
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Stereo playback
This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel
audio and are played.
1
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2Press STEREO.
Stereo playback begins.
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
• Tone (vpage73) • MultEQ® XT (vpage74)
• Dynamic EQ® (vpage74) • Dynamic Volume® (vpage75)
• M-DAX (vpage76)
1
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2Press P.DIRECT to select the
direct mode.
• If PURE DIRECT on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
• Each time P.DIRECT is pressed, the
direct mode is switched.
Source Direct This mode plays back tracks at high sound quality
without passing through the sound quality adjustment
circuits.
Pure Direct z
This mode plays back tracks at the closest to the
original sound quality.
Auto This mode detects the type of input digital signal,
and automatically selects the corresponding mode
for playback.
z The following circuits that affect sound quality are set to off.
• Main unit’s display circuit (The display is turned off.)
• Analog video input/output circuit
• To cancel, press P.DIRECT again.
• Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the
PURE DIRECT mode.
NOTE
When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the menu screen is not displayed.
Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby
Headphone playback
nDolby Virtual Speaker mode
This delivers a full surround sound experience from two stereo
speakers.
• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers.
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channnel
audio.
1
Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2Press SURR. to select “DOLBY
VS”.
nDolby Headphone mode
You can enjoy listening to multi-channel surround sound through
headphones using this mode.
Press
SURR.
to select the Dolby
Headphone mode.
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is
pressed, the same function as with the
remote control unit can be obtained.
• Each time SURR. is pressed, the Dolby
Headphone mode is switched.
DOLBY
HEADPHONE
This is the surround mode for listening with
headphones.
The surround sound field is played through regular
headphones.
DOLBY HP
BYPASS
The sound is played in the normal stereo mode
rather than the surround mode when listening with
headphones.
DOLBY HP
PLg Movie
This mode is best suited for movie sources.
DOLBY HP
PLg Music
This mode is best suited for music sources.
NOTE
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the
plug is removed from the jack.
• You can select Dolby HP PLg Movie or Dolby HP PLg Music when a
2-channel source is played back.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 46 2010/08/23 18:32:46
Advanced
version
47
Simple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced versionBasic version
F Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) vpage48
F Playback (Advanced operation) vpage55
F Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) vpage61
F How to make detailed settings vpage63
F Operating the connected devices by remote control unit vpage90
Advanced version
Here, we explain functions and operations that let you make better use of this unit.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 47 2010/08/23 18:32:46
48
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
This section provides the installation, connection,
and setup methods of speaker systems other
than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back
speakers).
For the speaker installation, connection, and setup
methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround
back speakers, see “Simple version (Simple setup
guide)” (vpage4).
Use Audyssey® Auto Setup function of this unit
to automatically detect the number of connected
speakers and perform optimal settings for the
speakers to be used.
Procedure for speaker settings
Install
Connect (vpage49)
Set up speakers (vpage52)
Install
This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX™ (vpage109) and
Dolby Pro Logic gz (vpage110), which offers an even wider and
deeper surround sensation.
When using Audyssey DSX, install front wide speakers or front
height speakers.
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers.
Install the surround back speakers in a position 2 to 3 ft (60 to 90 cm)
higher than ear level.
z1
z2
45˚
Surround
speaker
2 – 3 ft /
60 – 90 cm
GViewed from the sideH
Front height
speaker
• Point slightly
downwards
At least
3.3 ft / 1 m
Surround back
speaker
• Point slightly
downwards
Front
speaker
Front wide
speaker
z1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz
z2 Recommended for Audyssey DSX
NOTE
Sound is not output simultaneously from the surround back speakers,
front height speakers, and front wide speakers. You can switch
between speakers by changing the settings in surround mode or
Audyssey DSX.
When 7.1ch (Surround back / Front height / Front
wide speaker) installed
FHRFHL
FL FR
SL SR
FWL FWR
SW
C
SBL SBR
z1
z2
z3
z5
z4
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 22˚ – 45˚ z3 55˚ – 60˚
z4 90˚ – 110˚ z5 135˚ – 150˚
When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed
FL FR
C
SB
SL SR
SW
z1
z2
Listening position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 90˚ – 110˚
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 48 2010/08/23 18:32:47
49
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
When 5.1ch installed
FL FR
SW
C
SL
SR
z1
z2
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 120˚
When Front A/B speakers installed
FR(A) FR(B)
SW
FL(B) FL(A)
Listening position
FL Front speaker (L) SBL Surround back speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SBR Surround back speaker (R)
CCenter speaker FHL Front height speaker (L)
SW Subwoofer FHR Front height speaker (R)
SL Surround speaker (L) FWL Front wide speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R) FWR Front wide speaker (R)
SB Surround back speaker
Connect
• For the method of connecting the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see page 5.
• For the method of connecting the TV, see page 7.
nExample of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025 power amp
7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) connection
For 7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage52) to “Normal”.
FL FR
C
SBL SBR
SL SR
SW
FWRFWL
FHRFHL
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
GMM7025H
GMM7025H
GMM7025H
GMM7055H
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
Install
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 49 2010/08/23 18:32:48
50
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) connection
If you are using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the UNBALANCED or BALANCED PRE OUT
SBL terminals on the power amp.
For speaker settings in this case, see “When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed” (vpage48).
For 6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage52) to “Normal”.
FL FR
C
SB
SL SR
SW
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
GMM7025H
GMM7055H
Connect
5.1-channel connection
For 5.1-channel playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage52) to “Normal”.
FL FR
C
SL SR
SW
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
GMM7055H
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 50 2010/08/23 18:32:52
51
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Front A/B connection
A second set of front speakers can be connected to the
UNBALANCED PRE OUT HL/HR terminals on the power amp.
In this case, perform the settings using the SPKR A/B button on
the remote control or main unit (vpage26 “Set the front speakers
to be used”).
GMM7055H
FL(A)FL(B) FR(B)FR(A)
SW
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect
the center speaker, surround speakers, surround back speakers
(or front wide speakers) and subwoofers, 7.1-channel playback is
available.
Front speakers can be used separately, depending on the
speaker’s specifications or playback source such as front speakers
(A) for multichannel playback and front speakers (B) for 2-channel
playback.
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
2.1-channel connection
FL FR
SW
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
GMM7025H
nFor connecting four subwoofers
Four subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal.
Connect
Bi-Amp connection
A bi-amp connection is to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter
terminals and woofer terminals of speakers compatible with the bi-amp
function. This prevents the back electromotive force (returned force without
output) of the woofer sent to the tweeter, which affects the sound quality of
the tweeter, and you can enjoy playback with higher-quality sound.
In this case, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage52) to “SPKR-C”.
FL FR
wq wq
(R) (L)
GMM7055H
When a Bi-Amp connection is used, the same signal is output from the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT FL/FR and SBL/SBR terminals.
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center
speaker, surround speakers and subwoofers, 5.1-channel playback is
available.
NOTE
• Use speakers compatible with bi-amp connections.
• When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting
plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 51 2010/08/23 18:32:56
52
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Set up speakers around items indicate the settings.
1Set up the
remote control unit
nSet up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit
to amplier operation mode.
Press AMP
2Connect the setup microphone.
[1/6]
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
items if necessary.
Start Auto Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
This section provides the setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system
(with surround back speakers).
For the setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see “Simple
version”, “Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)” (vpage8) of “Simple version”.
First install and connect the speakers to this unit.
Before Auto Setup measurement, the settings shown below can be made.
• Changing the amplifier assignment (Amp Assign)
The signal output from the UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of this unit can
be switched to match your speaker environment. (vpage52 “Set up “Amp Assign””).
• Setting the channels to be used (Channel Select)
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and
measuring time can be reduced (vpage52 “Set up “Channel Select””).
nAudio output from each PRE OUT terminal
PRE OUT Channel
UNBALANCED PRE
OUT terminal FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR HL/HR WL/WR
BALANCED PRE
OUT terminal FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR --- ---
Audio Output Front A Center
Subwoofer 1 /
Subwoofer 2
Surround Surround
Back*
Front Height /
Front B Front Wide
*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.
3Set up “Amp Assign”
Use ui to select “Amp Assign”,
and then press ENTER.
[1/6]
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
items if necessary.
Set use of surround back ch. for your system
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
4Use o p to select the conguration
of the connected speakers, and then
press RETURN.
Normal Set when using surround
back, front height or front wide
speakers. In this case, go to step
5.
ZONE2 Set for connecting the speakers
for ZONE2.
ZONE3 Set for connecting the speakers
for ZONE3.
SPKR-C Set for connecting the tweeter
of the front speaker to the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED
PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of
the power amp, and the woofer
of the front speaker to the FL/FR
terminals.
5Set up “Channel Select”
Use ui to select “Channel Select”,
and then press ENTER.
[1/6]
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers
and place them accord-
ing to the recommenda-
tions in the manual.
Set the following
items if necessary.
Skip unused ch’s measurement for timesaving
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
ENTER Enter RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
6Use ui to select a channel.
Subwoofer Select for no subwoofers to be
used. In this case, go to step 7.
Surround
Back
Select for no surround back
speakers to be used. In this case,
go to step 8.
• “Surround Back” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Front
Height
Select for no front height speakers
to be used. In this case, go to step
9.
• “Front Height” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Front Wide Select for no front wide speakers to
be used. In this case, go to step 9.
• “Front Wide” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
7GWhen “Subwoofer” is selected in
step 6H
Use o p to select the item.
Measure Set for measuring a subwoofer.
Skip Set for no measuring of a subwoofer.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 52 2010/08/23 18:32:57
53
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Set up speakers
8GWhen “Surround Back” is selected
in step 6H
Use o p to select the item.
Measure
(2spkrs)
Set for measuring two surround back
speakers.
Measure
(1spkr)
Set for measuring a surround back
speaker.
Skip Set for no measuring of a surround
back speaker.
9GWhen “Front Height” or “Front
Wide” is selected in step 6H
Use o p to select the item.
Measure Set to measure the front height
speakers or front wide speakers.
Skip Set when you do not want to measure
the front height speakers or front wide
speakers.
10
Press RETURN.
Proceed to page 9 STEP1 Preparation
step 5.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey® Auto Setup, do not
change the speaker connections or subwoofer
volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Connections (Advanced connection)
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
When you use this unit connected to Marantz audio components, it sends operation signals to operate each component.
nConnection
Use the remote connection cable (supplied with a Marantz audio component you want to connect) to connect the REMOTE CONTROL OUT
terminal of this unit to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of the component to be connected.
nSetting
Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this feature.
• This setting will disable remote sensor reception of the connected audio component.
• To operate the connected audio component, point the remote control at the remote sensor of this unit.
EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUTIN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUTIN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUTIN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT IN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT IN
CD recorder CD playerDVD player
MM7025
MM7055
Remote control unit
Wireless receiver RX101 (vpage23)
NOTE
To use wireless receiver RX101 as external
IR receiver, set the remote sensor function
of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage89
“Remote control settings”).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 53 2010/08/23 18:32:59
54
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
RS-232C connector
When you connect an external control device, you can control this unit
with the external control device.
External serial controller
Perform the operation below beforehand.
q Turn on the power of this unit.
w Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
e Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks
When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s
power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this
unit.
The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical signal.
12 V/150 mA trigger-compatible device
Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the DC OUT
1 or 2 jack.
“Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage85)
in Set as Necessary
NOTE
If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger
than 12V/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used.
In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 54 2010/08/23 18:33:01
55
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
nHDMI control function (vpage55)
nSleep timer function (vpage56)
nAdjusting the volume of the speakers (vpage56)
nOperating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile
terminal to play music and still pictures (vpage57)
nWeb control function (vpage58)
nPanel lock function (vpage60)
nVarious memory functions (vpage60)
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage25)
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
(vpage44)
Playback (Advanced operation)
Convenient functions
HDMI control function
When you make an HDMI connection with a TV or player compatible
with this unit and HDMI control functions, you can perform the
following operations by setting the HDMI control function of each
device.
nThis unit power off can be linked to the TV power off
step.
nYou can switch audio output devices with a TV
operation.
When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output
setup operation, you can switch the amp power on.
nYou can adjust this unit volume in the TV volume
adjustment operation.
nYou can switch this unit input sources through
linkage to TV input switching.
nWhen playing the player, this unit input source
switches to the source for that player.
NOTE
• The HDMI control function only supports the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
To use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the
HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more
standby power.
• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is
compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV
and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.
• Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or
player. Check the user guide of each device for details beforehand.
• When “Power Off Control” on the menu is set to “OFF” (vpage81),
this unit is not set to standby even if the connected device is in the
standby mode.
• When connection changes are implemented, such as adding
connections to HDMI devices, linked operations may be initialized.
In this case, you will need to reconfi gure the settings.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it is not possible to assign an
HDMI connector to “TV” at “Input Assign” (vpage69).
1Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with
the HDMI control function.
Set “HDMI Control” (vpage80) to “ON“.
2Turn the power on for all the equipment connected
by HDMI cable.
3Set the HDMI control function for all equipment
connected by HDMI cable.
• Please consult the operating instructions for the connected
equipment to check the settings.
• Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be unplugged.
4Switch the television input to the HDMI input
connected to this unit.
5Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and
check if the picture from the player is ok.
6When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check
that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the
following points.
• Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function?
• Is “HDMI Control” (vpage80) set to “ON”?
• Is “Power Off Control” (vpage81) set to “All” or “Video”?
• Are the HDMI control function settings of all equipment correct?
• Is the television connected to the HDMI OUT 1 connector?
NOTE
Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking
function may be reset, in which case, repeat steps 2 and 3.
• “Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage69) setting has changed.
• “Monitor Out” (vpage80) setting is changed.
• There is a change to the connection between the equipment and the
HDMI, or an increase in equipment.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 55 2010/08/23 18:33:02
56
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Convenient functions
Sleep timer function
The power automatically goes into standby once the set time has
elapsed.
This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep.
1Press AMP to set the remote
control unit to amplier operation
mode.
2Press SLEEP and display the time
you want to set.
The indicator on the display lights.
• If SLLEP on the main unit is pressed,
the same function as with the remote
control unit can be obtained.
• The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is pressed.
OFF 10 min 20 30 40 50
6080 7090100
110
120
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “OFF”.
The indicator on the display turns off.
• The sleep timer setting is canceled if this unit’s power is set to
standby or turned off.
• When power to the main zone is turned off with the sleep timer,
power in ZONE2 and ZONE3 are also turned off.
Adjusting the volume of the speakers
You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback
sources or to suit your taste, as described below.
nAdjusting the volume of the different speakers
1Press AMP to set the remote
control unit to amplier operation
mode.
2Press CH LVL.
Front L
Front R
Center
Subwoofer
Surround L
Surround R
S.Back L
S.Back R
Fader
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
CHANNEL LEVEL
Select
Front Rear
3Use ui to select the speaker.
The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the
buttons is pressed.
4Use o p to adjust the volume.
• In the case of a subwoofer, pressing o when it is at “–12 dB” will
change the setting to “OFF”.
• When a headphone jack is inserted, the headphone channel level
can be adjusted.
• When the input mode setting is “7.1CH IN”, you can adjust the
channel level while the 7.1CH INPUT connector is being used. In
that case, “7.1CH IN Level” appears at the top of the screen.
nAdjusting the volume of groups of speakers
(Fader function)
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound all at once from the
front (front speaker / front height speaker / front wide speaker /
center speaker) or rear (surround speaker / surround back speaker).
1Press AMP to set the remote
control unit to amplier operation
mode.
2Press CH LVL.
Front L
Front R
Center
Subwoofer
Surround L
Surround R
S.Back L
S.Back R
Fader
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
CHANNEL LEVEL
Select
Front Rear
3Press i to select “Fader”, then select the item to be
adjusting using o p.
4Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.
(o : front, p: rear)
• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker is adjusted
to the lowest value of –12 dB.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 56 2010/08/23 18:33:03
57
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal to play
music and still pictures
• Perform this procedure using a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal conforming to the DLNA (Digital
Living Network Alliance) standard.
• This function allows you to play content located on a computer (media server) or mobile terminal device
connected on a network by operating a mobile terminal device on the same network.
• There are two types of operations on the mobile terminal device.
nPlaying content on a computer (Media server)
Streaming Streaming
This unit
q Select content.
w Select a player.
e Start playback.
r Operate.
Wireless LAN-
compatible router
Computer
(Media server)
Mobile terminal device
1From the mobile terminal device, browse the media server on the same network
and choose the content you want to play.
2From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the
network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage82 “Friendly Name Edit”).
• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:
• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
• Volume adjustment
nPlaying contents on a mobile terminal device
This unit
q Select content.
w Select a player.
e Start playback.
r Operate.
Wireless LAN-
compatible router Mobile terminal device
1Select the content you want to play from among the mobile terminal devices.
2From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the
network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage82 “Friendly Name Edit”).
• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:
• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
• Volume adjustment
• is displayed on the menu screen while the mobile terminal device is being operated.
• For the various settings and operating procedures, see the operating instructions of the mobile terminal
devices being used.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name”. “Friendly Name” can be edited at “Friendly Name Edit” (vpage82) as desired so that it is easily
distinguishable from other devices.
• When playback is started from the mobile terminal device, this unit’s input source automatically switches
to “NET/USB”. Also, when the “Network Standby” setting (vpage 82) is set to “ON”, the power
automatically turns on.
NOTE
When operations related to browsing or playback (play, stop, pause, track search) are performed on this
unit while operating the mobile terminal device, the connection to the network is disconnected.
Convenient functions
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 57 2010/08/23 18:33:03
58
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Web control function
You can operate this unit using a browser.
1Switch the “Network Standby” setting to “ON”.
(vpage 82).
2Check the IP address of this unit with “Network
Information” (vpage 83).
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK INFORMATION
RETURN Return
Friendly Name marantz:[AV7005]
DHCP ON
IP Address 192.168.100.19
MAC Address ************
Checking the IP address.
3Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”,
enter “http://192.168.100.19”.
MAIN ZONE
-25.0dB
Status
ZONE2
-25dB
Status
ZONE3
Status
-60dB
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Marantz Web Controller
AV7005
Wed Control Config.
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
Setup Menu
q
q Entering the IP address.
4When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.
MAIN ZONE
-25.0dB
Status
ZONE2
-25dB
Status
ZONE3
Status
-60dB
Marantz Web Controller
AV7005
PDA Menu Wed Control Config.
Setup Menu
w
t
er
w Click when you operate each zone. (vGExample 1H)
e Click when you operate the setup menu. (vGExample 2H)
r Click to change the Web control screen setting.
(vGExample 3H)
t Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen,
etc. (vGExample 4H)
5Operate.
GExample 1H Main zone control screen
MAIN ZONE
POWER
NET/USB
SOURCE
Sleep Timer
Player
Video
Network
Tuner
VOLUME -75.5dB
Note
To use the web control function,set the GUI menu “Manual Setup” - “Network Setup” -
“Other” -“Network Standby” setting to “ON”
∞-80 18100-10-20-30-40-50-60-70
ZONE CONTROL >
><
ON STANDBY
CHANNEL LEVEL >
NET AUDIO / USB >
iPod Direct >
RELOAD
TOP MENU
Add To Your Favorite
u
i
y
o
y Click to perform individual operations.
Changes to individual operation screens. (vGExample 5H)
u Click when you update to the latest information.
Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time
you operate. When operating from the main unit, click this or else
the screen will not be updated.
i Click to return to the top menu.
Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in
GExample 3H
o Click to add a setting to “Favorites” in your browser.
We recommend registering the setting screens for the different
zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform
menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate.
Convenient functions
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 58 2010/08/23 18:33:04
59
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Convenient functions
GExample 2H Setup menu screen
SETUP MENU
SOURCE SELECT
Source
Input Assign
Video
Video Select
DVD
SOURCE
Auto
Auto
Video Convert ON
Analog Analog & HDMI OFF
Auto 480p/576p
AUTO VIDEO1 VIDEO2
Full Normal
1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
OFF
Video Mode Auto Game Movie
i/p Scaler
Resolution(analog)
Resolution(HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
Input Mode
Input Mode
Decode Mode
SOURCE SELECT
ReLoad
Rename
Source Level(analog) 0 Set
DVD Set Def
dB
<
<
Source Level(digital) 0 SetdB
<
<
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
MANUAL SETUP
INFORMATION
SAVE
LOAD
Q0 Q2 Q3
Q4
Q5
Q1
Q0 Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.
The display on the right becomes the individual setting screens.
Q1 Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click
“LOAD” when you want to call settings.
Q2 Click “v” and select from the displayed items.
Q3 Click an item to make a setting.
Q4 After entering characters, click “Set” to set, or click “Def” to
return to default setting.
Q5 Enter fi gures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then
click “Set”.
GExample 3H Web confi guration screen
Web Controller Config.
Top Menu Link Setup
ON OFF
Back Top Menu
Q6
Q7
Q6 Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup.
When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen.
(Default setting : “OFF”)
Q7 Click this item to return to the top menu.
GExample 4H PDA menu screen
Marantz Web Controller
Main Zone Control
Multi Zone2 Control
Multi Zone3 Control
Q8
Q8 Select this item to operate each zone.
NOTE
You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the
PDA menu screen.
GExample 5H Net Audio operating screen
ZONE CONTROL
NET AUDIO/USB(MAIN ZONE)
Now Playing
HOT LOVE & EMOTION
128kbps
ONE
MEMORY
ALL
REPEAT RANDOM
OFF ON OFF
PRESET OFF A1
-75.5dB
>
∞-80 18100-10-20-30-40-50-60-70
NET AUDIO/USB
>
CHANNEL LEVEL
>
iPod Direct
>
RELOAD
><
PRESET MEMORY CHARACTER SEARCH
/VIRGINELLE Q9
W2
W6
W1W0
W4
W5
W3
Q9 Click the menu items. from which you want to play.
W0 Click “v” to select the preset channel you want to play.
W1 When registering presets, click “v” to select the channel you
want to register, and then click “MEMORY”.
W2 When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select from the
displayed characters.
W3 Click this item to play back repeatedly.
W4 Click this item when selecting menu items.
W5 Click to stop playback.
W6 Click this item to play back randomly.
GExample 6H Dedicated iPod Touch screen
Down Up
Zone Power
Main Zone
Source
Volume
-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0
iPod Direct NetAudio/USB
• When accessed from the iPod Touch browser, an optimized
operation screen is displayed.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 59 2010/08/23 18:33:04
60
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Convenient functions
Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation
of the buttons on the front panel.
nDisabling all key button operations
AUTO DISPLAY
ON/STANDBY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold AUTO and
DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations
except ON/STANDBY are disabled.
nDisabling all button operations except VOLUME
PURE DIRECT DISPLAY
ON/STANDBY VOLUME
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold PURE
DIRECT and DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations
except ON/STANDBY and VOLUME are disabled.
nCanceling the Panel lock function
DISPLAY
ON/STANDBY i
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold i and
DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
The Panel lock function is canceled.
Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit
using the remote control unit.
Various memory functions
nPersonal memory plus function
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, HDMI
output mode, MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ®, Dynamic Volume®,
audio delay etc.) last selected for the individual input sources.
The surround parameters, tone settings and the volumes of the
different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.
nLast function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going
into the standby mode.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 60 2010/08/23 18:33:05
61
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
• You can operate this unit so as to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2, ZONE3) other than the MAIN ZONE
(room where the unit is located).
• You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can
also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Audio output
There are two methods to do this, as described below. Choose one of the methods.
q Zone playback by audio output(UNBALANCED and BALANCED)
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
Use an external amplifier.
q
Zone playback by audio output (UNBALANCED and BALANCED)
Using the amplifier assign function, zone 2 and zone 3 auto signals are output from this unit’s UNBALANCED
and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals.
nConnecting and setting the speakers
(Example of connections to Marantz MM7025 power amp)
“Amp Assign” setting
(vpage78) and audio
signals output
Connecting the speakers
ZONE2
ZONE2
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
ZONE2
w q w q
(L) (R)
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
“Amp Assign” setting
(vpage78) and audio
signals output
Connecting the speakers
ZONE3
ZONE3
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
ZONE3
w q w q
(L) (R)
BALANCED
UNBALANCED
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
nAudio connections (ZONE2, ZONE3)
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and
ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.
AUX INAUX IN
R
L
R
L
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2 ZONE3
This unit
We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.
NOTE
• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected
in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.
• It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Use analog connections for ZONE2 or ZONE3 playback.
• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio
output connectors.
• The menu screen is not output.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 61 2010/08/23 18:33:06
62
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Video output
Video Connection
The video signals of this unit’s ZONE2 video output terminal are
played by the ZONE2 TV.
VIDEO
IN
ZONE2
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y PBPR
MAIN ZONE ZONE2
This unit
NOTE
• It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI terminals
to ZONE2.
• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal
output, set “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Component2
Output” (vpage85) in the menu to “ZONE2”.
• The menu screen is not output.
Playback
1Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the
remote control operating mode.
The remote control unit switches to the
operating mode for ZONE2 or ZONE3.
2Press ON to turn on the ZONE2
or ZONE3 power.
The or indicator on the
display lights.
• When STANDBY is pressed, ZONE2 or
ZONE3 turns off.
• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned
on or off by pressing SOURCE ON/OFF.
• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned
on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF or
ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3Press INPUT df.
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
• Turn INPUT SELECTOR after
pressing ZONE SELECT on the
main unit to select an input
source.
When power for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 is set to ON, power of
the MAIN ZONE only can be turned off. Select “AMP” in step 1 then
press STANDBY.
Adjusting the volume
Use VOLUME to adjust the volume.
GAdjustable rangeH – – – –80dB – –40dB – 18dB
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage84) setting is “Relative”)
GAdjustable rangeH 0 – 41 – 99
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage84) setting is “Absolute”)
• At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage83) is set to “–10dB
(71)”.
Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust
the sound volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage84) in
the menu.
• To cancel, either adjust the volume or press MUTE again.
• The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 in “Zone
Setup” (vpage83) in the menu.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 62 2010/08/23 18:33:06
63
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Menu map
For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and
display the menu on the TV screen. For menu
operations, see the following page.
How to make detailed settings
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
1. Audio/Video Adjust
Adjust various audio parameters
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Audio Adjust Adjuts various audio parameters. 73
Picture Adjust Adjusts the picture quality. 77
2. Information
Shows information about current settings
Status
Audio Input Signal
HDMI Information
Preset Channel
INFORMATION
Status Shows information about current settings. 88
Audio Input Signal Shows information about audio input signals. 88
HDMI Information Displays the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information. 88
Preset Channel Shows information about tuner or network preset channels. 88
3. Auto Setup
Optimize settings for speakers in use
Audyssey Auto Setup
Parameter Check
AUTO SETUP
Audyssey Auto Setup Makes the optimum settings for the speakers being used automatically. 8
Parameter Check Checks Audyssey® Auto Setup measurement results.
This item is only displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup procedure has been
performed.
12
4. Manual Setup
Make detailed speaker settings
Speaker Setup
HDMI Setup
Audio Setup
Network Setup
Zone Setup
Option Setup
MANUAL SETUP
Speaker Setup Sets the speaker size and distance, the channel level, etc. 78
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output. 80
Audio Setup Makes settings for audio playback. 81
Network Setup Makes network settings. 81
Zone Setup Makes settings for audio playback in a multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) system. 83
Option Setup Makes various other settings. 84
5. Input Setup
(Example: “HD Radio”)
Auto Preset
Preset Skip
Preset Name
Video
Rename
Source Level
INPUT SETUP
Displayed items of the “Input Setup”
menu differs, depending on the
selected input source.
Auto Preset Uses the auto preset function to program radio stations. 67
Preset Skip Sets the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning. 67
Parental Lock Sets the Parental Lock. 67
Antenna Aiming Adjusts the SIRIUS reception sensitivity. 68
Preset Name Assigns name to a preset memory. 68
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 68
Video Makes the video settings. 69
Input Mode Sets the audio input mode and decode mode. 71
Rename Changes the display name for this source. 71
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 71
Playback Mode Makes settings for iPod, USB memory device or network source playback. 71
Still Picture Makes settings for still picture playback. 72
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
MENU
Items that only need to be set
once
Set these for example upon purchase.
Once these items are set, there is
no need to set them again unless
the speaker layout or the connected
speakers have been changed.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 63 2010/08/23 18:33:07
64
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Examples of menu and front display
Below we describe typical examples of displays on the TV screen and on the set’s display window.
Menu display Front display Description
Top menu display
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
MENU
q
w
w
*MENU
A/V Adjust –
q The menu items are displayed here.
w The selected line is displayed here.
The currently selected item is displayed on the display.
Use ui to move to the item you want to set.
Display when changing settings
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
Change HDMI input connector assignment
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
ENTER EnterSelect RETURN Return
Default
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ HDMI ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ DIGITAL ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
[ COMP ]
q
w
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
Assign HDMI 1 input connector
ENTER EnterSelect RETURN Cancel
Default
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ HDMI ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ DIGITAL ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
[ COMP ]
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
e
Press ENTER.
q
*Input Assign
BD [HDMI1 ]
e
*Input Assign
BD •HDMI1 –
Press ENTER.
q Use uio p to move to the item you want to set.
w Press ENTER to set to the mode in which the setting can be made.
e “0” and “1” is displayed at the sides of item whose setting can be
changed. Use o p to change to the desired setting.
Display when inputting characters
DVD
Default
DVD
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
RETURN CancelENTER Enter
Input
a/A KeyboardSHIFT SEARCH
w
q
q
*Rename:DVD
•DVD –
q When o p is pressed, the cursor moves to the left or right.
w When ui is pressed at the position where you want to input the
character, the character is input.
For inputting characters on a keyboard screen or with the number buttons
on the remote control unit, see page 65.
Display when resetting
DVD
Default
DVD
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
RETURN ReturnENTER Enter
q
*Rename
Default? :•No
q
*Rename
Default
Press ENTER.
q Press i to select “Default”, then press ENTER to set.
w Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 64 2010/08/23 18:33:08
65
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Inputting characters
You can change the names as desired using the “Preset Name”
(vpage68), “Rename” (vpage71), “Rhapsody Account” (vpage83),
“Napster Account” (vpage83), “Zone Rename” (vpage85) and
character input for the network functions.
For inputting characters, there are three methods, as shown below.
Method for inputting characters
Method Operations
Using the cursor buttons
(Normal screen)
• Operating with the remote control unit
or the main unit.
• Use uio p and ENTER to input
characters.
Using the keyboard
screen
• Operating with the remote control unit.
• Select a character on the TV screen to
input characters.
Normal screen
nDisplay of a normal input screen
GRename / Zone RenameH
DVD
Default
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
RETURN CancelENTER Enter
Input
a/A KeyboardSHIFT SEARCH
DVD q
w
GAccount input / Search by text / Proxy Name /
Friendly Name EditH
Edit
Default
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER
FRIENDLY NAME EDIT
marantz:[AV7005]
RETURN CancelENTER EnterInput
InsertINSERT DeleteDELETEKeyboardSEARCH
q
w
q Character input section
w Guide for operation buttons
Using the cursor buttons
1
Display the screen for inputting characters
(vpage 63 “Menu map”).
2Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want
to change.
3Use ui to change the character,
then press ENTER.
• The types of characters that can be input
are as shown below.
GUpper case charactersH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
GLower case charactersH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) z + , - . / : ; <
= > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜
GNumbersH0123456789 (Space)
• The input character type can be switched by pressing SHIFT/TOP
MENU while the display name is being changed.
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name then press
ENTER to register it.
Keyboard screen
nDisplay of a keyboard input screen
GRename / Zone RenameH
BDBD
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
RETURN CancelENTER InputSelect
a/A NormalSHIFT SEARCH
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
D
Q
3
’
E
R
4
(
L
Y
”
=
M
Z
#
>
G
T
6
z
F
S
5
)
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
K
X
!
<
J
W
9
;
C
P
2
&
Clear Space 0 1 O K
r
q
u
i
y
w
e
t
GAccount input / Search by text / Proxy Name /
Friendly Name EditH
marantz:[AV7005]Edit
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER
FRIENDLY NAME EDIT
RETURN CancelENTER InputSelect
a/A NormalSHIFT SEARCH
a
n
0
_
b
o
1
/
d
q
3
˜
e
r
4
?
l
y
@
|
m
z
-
}
g
t
6
\
f
s
5
[
h
u
7
]
i
v
8
^
k
x
.
{
j
w
9
ˋ
c
p
2
:
Clear Space
0
1
Ins Del O K
r
q
u
i
w
e
ty o Q0
q Character input section
w Cursor
e Keyboard section
r Clear key
t Space key
y Cursor keys
u OK key
i Guide for operation buttons
o Insert key
Q0 Delete key
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 65 2010/08/23 18:33:09
66
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Inputting characters
1
Display the screen for inputting characters
(vpage 63 “Menu map”).
2Press SEARCH/INFO while a normal screen is
displayed.
A keyboard screen is displayed.
3Select a character to be changed.
q Press uio p to select
or .
w Press ENTER to place the
cursor at the character to be
changed.
Each time ENTER is pressed, the
cursor moves by one character.
4Select a character to be input with uio p then
press ENTER.
• The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
GUpper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789
! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) z + , ; < = >
GLower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
• The input character type can be switched by pressing SHIFT/TOP
MENU while the display name is being changed.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the name.
6Use uio p to select , then press ENTER.
Input Setup
Perform settings related to input source playback.
• You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Menu operation
1Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplier operation
mode.
2Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN.
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Important information
nAbout the display of input sources
In this section, the configurable input sources for each item are shown as follows.
BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV CD CDR PHONO SIRIUS
HD Radio M-XPort
NOTE
Input sources that have been set to “Delete” at “Source Delete” (vpage84) cannot be selected.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 66 2010/08/23 18:33:09
67
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Items that can be set with the Input Setup procedure
INPUT SETUP
AUTO PRESET
Start the auto preset process
Start
ENTER Enter RETURN Return
Block
A Block Presets
A1 FM 87.50MHz
A2 FM 87.90MHz
A3 FM 89.10MHz
A4 FM 93.30MHz
A5 FM 97.90MHz
A6 AM 98.10MHz
A7 AM 98.90MHz
A8 AM 100.10MHz
A
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INPUT SETUP
PRESET SKIP
Change memory blocks
RETURN Return
[1/7]
Block
A1 FM 87.50MHz
A2 FM 87.90MHz
A3 FM 89.10MHz
A4 FM 93.30MHz
A5 FM 97.90MHz
A6 AM 98.10MHz
A7 AM 98.90MHz
A8 AM 100.10MHz
A
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
INPUT SETUP
PRESET NAME
Change memory blocks
RETURN Return
[1/7]
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
Change HDMI input connector assignment
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
ENTER EnterSelect RETURN Return
Default
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ HDMI ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ DIGITAL ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
[ COMP ]
DVD
Default
DVD
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
RETURN Return
Video Select
Video Mode
Video Convert
i/p Scaler
Resolution(Analog)
Resolution(HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
Source
Auto
ON
Analog & HDMI
Auto
Auto
Auto
Full
INPUT SETUP
VIDEO
Select desired video input source
RETURN Return
Input Mode
Decode Mode
Auto
Auto
INPUT SETUP
INPUT MODE
Automatically detect input signal and playback
RETURN Return
Slide Show
Interval
OFF
5sec
INPUT SETUP
STILL PICTURE
Display only the selected still picture image
RETURN Return
Auto Preset (vpage67)
Input Assign (vpage68)
Rename (vpage71)Video (vpage69) Input Mode (vpage71)
Still Picture (vpage72)
Preset Skip (vpage67)
Preset Name (vpage68)
Analog Input
Digital Input
0dB
0dB
INPUT SETUP
SOURCE LEVEL
Compensate analog audio input playback level
RETURN Return
Source Level (vpage71)
Repeat
Random
OFF
OFF
INPUT SETUP
PLAYBACK MODE
Cancel repeat mode
RETURN Return
Playback Mode (vpage71)
INPUT SETUP
PARENTAL LOCK
Set a listening limit to any channel
Lock Setting
Edit Lock Code
Satellite
Terrestrial
INPUT SETUP
ANTENNA AIMING
Adjust antenna position for best signal
RETURN Return
Parental Lock (vpage67)
Antenna Aiming (vpage68)
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Input Setup
Auto Preset
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
Setting items Setting details
Start
Start the auto preset
process.
HD Radio
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired
station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
Preset Skip Default settings are underlined.
Set preset channel to be skipped when selecting.
Setting items Setting details
A – G
Set the preset channels you
do not want to display. You
can set by preset memory
block (A to G) or by preset
channel (1 to 8).
SIRIUS HD Radio
1 – 8 : Set by individual preset channels in the currently selected preset
memory block.
• ON : Display the selected preset channel.
• Skip : Do not display the selected preset channel.
If you set “Block Presets” to “Skip”, you can skip the preset memory
blocks (A to G).
Parental Lock Default settings are underlined.
For any channel, set the radio reception limits.
Setting items Setting details
Lock Setting
Set the channel radio
reception limits.
SIRIUS
1. Press ui to select “Lock Setting”, and then press p or ENTER.
2. Pressing uio p, input the password (4 digits number) and press
ENTER.
3. Select channel by pressing ui, and set the lock by pressing o p.
Unlock : Do not lock selected channel(s).
Lock : Lock selected channel(s). When a Parental Locked channel is
tuned, “Enter Lock Code” is displayed, then input the password.
• The default password is “0000”.
• If the password is wrong, “Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed. Input
the correct password.
• While listening to the channel being played, you can also set parental
lock (vpage32).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 67 2010/08/23 18:33:10
68
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Input Setup
Setting items Setting details
Edit Lock Code
Change the password.
SIRIUS
1. Press ui to select “Edit Lock Code”, and then press p or ENTER.
2. Input current lock code (4 digits) using uio p, and press ENTER.
3. Input new lock code (4 digits) using uio p, and press ENTER.
4. Input new lock code (4 digits) again using uio p, and press ENTER.
5. Press ui to select “Execute”, and then press ENTER.
If the correct password is input, “Completed” is displayed, and the new
password is modified.
• If the old password is incorrectly input, “Current Lock Code is incorrect”
is displayed, and proceed again from step 1.
• If the password input is 3 digits or less, “Enter 4 digits number” is
displayed, and input again with a 4 digit password.
• If the new password is not correctly input, “New Lock Codes do not
Match” is displayed and the password does not change.
Antenna Aiming
Install the antenna with radio reception sensitivity set to maximum.
Setting items Setting details
Satellite
Indicate satellite signal
strength.
SIRIUS
Display Condition
¡¡¡ Signal strength is excellent
¡¡ Signal strength is good
¡Signal strength is weak
No signal
Terrestrial
Indicate terrestrial signal
strength.
SIRIUS
Preset Name
Assign name to a preset memory.
Setting items Setting details
A1 – G8
Select the preset channel.
HD Radio
• Up to eight characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
Default
The changed preset name
is returned to the default
setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
Input Assign
Examples of input assign menu screen displays
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
Change HDMI input connector assignment
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
ENTER EnterSelect RETURN Return
Default
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ HDMI ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ DIGITAL ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
[ COMP ]
q
ew r
q Input Source
w HDMI input
e Digital audio input
r Component video input
Input assignments menu operations
1Use uio p to move the highlight to the item you want to set.
2Press ENTER, then use o p to select the input connector to be
assigned.
3Press ENTER to register the setting.
NOTE
If all “HDMI”, “Digital” and “Component” assignment of the Game source are set to “None”, Game
source cannot be selected with the input source selection.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 68 2010/08/23 18:33:10
69
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Input Setup
Setting items Setting details
HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV
HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6
None : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input
source.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input
source BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 TV
Default
setting HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 4 HDMI
3
HDMI
5
HDMI
6None
• An input source to which an HDMI input connector cannot be assigned
is displayed as “– – –”.
• To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign“ – “Digital”, select “Digital” at “Input
Mode” (vpage71).
• The audio signals input from the analog and digital connectors are not
output to the monitor.
• When “HDMI Control” (vpage80) is set to “ON”, HDMI input connector
cannot be assigned to “TV”.
Digital
Set this to change the digital
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV CD CDR
SIRIUS
Coax1 – 2 (COAXIAL) / Opt1 – 3 (OPTICAL)
None : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1
Default
setting None Coax
1None Coax
2None Opt
3
Input source TV CD CDR SIRIUS
Default
setting
Opt
1
Opt
2None None
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Setting items Setting details
Component
Set this to change the
component video input
connectors assigned to the
input sources.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV
1-RCA / 2-RCA / 3-RCA / 4-RCA (Component video)
None : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected
input source.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input
source BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 TV
Default
setting 1-RCA 2-RCA 4-RCA 3-RCA None None None
An input source to which an component video input connector cannot be
assigned is displayed as “– – –”.
Default
The “Input Assign” settings
are returned to the default
settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
If you select “Default” and press ENTER, the message “Default
Setting?” is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then press ENTER.
Video Default settings are underlined.
Set the source video.
z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage69) or “Component” (vpage69) has been
assigned.
Setting items Setting details
Video Select
Video of another input
source is played back
combined with the playing
audio.
Source : Play the picture and sound of the input source.
BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV : Select video input source to
view. This can be set for individual input sources.
“GAME” and “TV” can be selected only when a component video is
assigned as an input source.
NOTE
• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected
at “Source Delete” (vpage 84) cannot be
selected.
• This can also be set by pressing V.SEL on the
remote control unit.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 69 2010/08/23 18:33:11
70
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Input Setup
Setting items Setting details
Video Mode
Make settings for video
processing.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 TV z
Auto : Process video automatically based on the HDMI content
information.
Movie : Process video normally.
Game : Always process video appropriate for game content.
• If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the
input contents.
• If a source is played in both MAIN ZONE (audio and video) and ZONE2
(audio only) modes in the same room, audio in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
modes may sound out of synchronization, but this is not malfunction. In
this case, setting to “Game” mode may improve audio synchronization.
Video Convert
The input video signal is
converted automatically
in conjunction with the
connected TV (vpage14
“Converting input video
signals for output (Video
conversion function)”).
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 TV z
ON : The input video signal is converted.
OFF : The input video signal is not converted.
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other
source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this
case set “Video Convert” to “OFF”.
• When “Video Convert” is set to “OFF”, the video conversion function
does not work. In this case, connect this unit and TV with the same type
of cable.
i/p Scaler
Convert the input source’s
resolution to the resolution
set at “Resolution”.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 NET/USB
TV z
Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal.
Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signal.
OFF : Do not use i/p scaler function.
• “Analog & HDMI” and “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an
HDMI input connector is assigned.
• Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each
input connector.
• This function is not effective when the input signal is x.v.Color, 3D,
sYCC 601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC 601 color or computer
resolution.
Setting items Setting details
Resolution
Set the output resolution.
Resolution (Analog) :
Analog Video
Resolution (HDMI) : HDMI
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 NET/USB
TV z
Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output
connector supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output
resolution is set.
480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz : Set the output resolution.
• This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
• When “i/p Scaler” is set to ”Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the
analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.
• To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video
signals.
• When set to “1080p/24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film
sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend
setting the resolution to “1080p”.
• It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output
at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate
progressive conversion
mode for the source video
signal.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 TV z
Auto : The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate
mode is set.
Video1 : Select mode suitable for video playback
Video2 : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material
playback.
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
Aspect
Set the aspect ratio for the
video signals output to the
HDMI.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 NET/USB
TV z
Full : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
Normal : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio.
“Aspect” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage69) or “Component” (vpage69) has been
assigned.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 70 2010/08/23 18:33:11
71
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Input Setup
Input Mode Default settings are underlined.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.
Setting items Setting details
Input Mode
Set the audio input modes
for the different input
sources.
Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital : Play only signals from digital input.
Analog : Play only signals from analog input.
7.1CH IN : Only signals input from the 7.1CH INPUT terminal will be
played back.
• This can also be set by pressing A/D on the
remote control unit.
• Each time A/D is pressed, the setting is changed
as shown below.
Auto HDMI Digital Analog
7.1CH IN
• “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage69).
• “Digital” can be set for input sources for which “Digital” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage69).
• If the input source is set to “TV” or “Game”, it cannot be set to “Analog”.
• When digital signals are properly input, the indicator lights on
the display. If the indicator does not light, check the digital input
connector assignment and the connections.
• The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
• If “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI OUT connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV” is fixed to ARC.
Decode Mode
Set the decode mode for
input source.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV CD CDR
Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically.
PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.
• This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is
assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage68).
• Normally set this mode to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when
inputting the corresponding input signal.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Rename
Change the display name of the selected input source.
Setting items Setting details
Rename
Change the display name of
the selected input source.
• Up to eight characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
Default
The input source name
is returned to the default
setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
Source Level Default settings are underlined.
• This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
• Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
Setting details
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for
which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign“ (vpage68).
Playback Mode
Make settings for repeat playback mode or random playback mode.
Setting items Setting details
Repeat
Make settings for repeat
mode.
NET/USB
All : All files are played repeatedly.
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
OFF : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
Random
Make random mode
settings.
NET/USB
ON : Enable random playback.
OFF : Disable random playback.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 71 2010/08/23 18:33:11
72
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Audio/Video Adjust
The sound being played in the surround mode can be adjusted to your liking.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set
surround mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Surround modes and parameters”
(vpage104).
Menu operation
1Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplier operation
mode.
2Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN.
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the Audio/Video Adjust procedure
Audio Adjust (vpage73)
nSurround Parameter (vpage73)
nTone (vpage73)
nAudyssey Settings (vpage74)
nA-DSX Soundstage (vpage75)
nManual EQ (vpage76)
nM-DAX (vpage76)
nAudio Delay (vpage76)
Picture Adjust (vpage77)
Still Picture Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for playing back still picture images.
Setting items Setting details
Slide Show
Make slide show settings.
NET/USB
ON : Display still picture images in a slide show.
OFF : Display only the selected still picture image.
Interval
Set the playback time per
image.
NET/USB
5sec – 60sec
Input Setup
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 72 2010/08/23 18:33:11
73
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Audio Adjust
nSurround Parameter Default settings are underlined.
Adjust surround sound parameters. It may not be possible to set this item depending on the input
signal.
Setting items Setting details
HT-EQ
Soften the treble range
of movie soundtracks for
better understanding.
ON : “HT-EQ” is used.
OFF : “HT-EQ” is not used.
DRC
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to
source. This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Dynamic range compression always off.
D.Comp
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Turn dynamic range compression off.
LFE
Adjust the low-frequency
effects level (LFE).
–10dB – 0dB
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting
to the values below.
• Dolby Digital sources : “0dB”
• DTS movie sources : “0dB”
• DTS music sources : “–10dB”
C.Image
Assign center channel
signal to front left and right
channels for wider sound.
0.0 – 1.0 (0.3)
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also
to surround channels for
wider sound.
ON : Set.
OFF : Do not set.
Dimension
Shift sound image center
to front or rear to adjust
playback balance.
0 – 6 (3)
C.Width
Assign center channel
signal to front left and right
channels for wider sound.
0 – 7 (3)
Setting items Setting details
Height Gain
Control the front height
channel volume.
Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.
Mid : Front height channel sound is output with standard sound volume.
High : Increase the front height channel volume.
NOTE
“Height Gain” is displayed for the following settings.
• When “Amp Assign” (vpage78) is set to “Normal”.
• When the “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” setting (vpage78) is set
other than to “None”.
• When surround mode is “PLgz” or the PLgz decoder is used.
Default
The “Surround Parameter”
settings are returned to the
default settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
nTone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Setting items Setting details
Tone Control
Set the tone control function
to ON and OFF.
ON : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
OFF : Playback without tone adjustment.
“Tone Control” can be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage74) is set to
“OFF”.
NOTE
• “Tone Control” settings are not reflected to ZONE2 and ZONE3.
• The tone cannot be adjusted in the direct mode.
Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
–6dB – +6dB
“Bass” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
Treble
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
–6dB – +6dB
“Treble” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
Audio/Video Adjust
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 73 2010/08/23 18:33:12
74
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting items Setting details
Dynamic EQ®
Solve the problem of
deteriorating sound quality
as volume is decreased
by taking into account
human perception and
room acoustics. Works with
MultEQ XT.
ON : Use Dynamic EQ.
OFF : Do not use Dynamic EQ.
• is displayed when set to “ON”.
• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit
can be used for operations.
Press DYN EQ/VOL.
Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is
changed as shown below.
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Heavy
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : OFF
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Light
Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is
referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes
adjustments to maintain
the reference response
and surround envelopment
when the volume is turned
down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not
always used in music or
other non-film content.
Dynamic EQ Reference
Level Offset provides three
offsets from the film level
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB) that can be selected
when the mix level of the
content is not within the
standard.
0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when
listening to movies.
5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range,
such as classical music.
10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material
that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
range.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” (vpage74).
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
nAudyssey Settings Default settings are underlined.
Set MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ® and Dynamic Volume®. These can be selected after Audyssey® Auto
Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see page 109.
NOTE
If you have not performed Auto Setup, or if you change the speaker settings after performing Auto Setup,
you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume, and “Run Audyssey” may be displayed.
In this case, either perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again or perform “Restore” (vpage12) to return to
the settings after Audyssey Auto Setup was run.
Setting items Setting details
MultEQ XT
Select one equalizer from
three modes. MultEQ XT
corrects both time and
frequency response
problems in the listening
area based on Audyssey
Auto Setup calibration. We
recommend “Audyssey”.
MultEQ XT is the
prerequisite function for
Dynamic EQ and Dynamic
Volume.
Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.
Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except
front L and R speakers.
Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat
response.
Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage76).
OFF : Turn “MultEQ XT” equalizer off.
• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be
selected after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed. “Audyssey”
is automatically selected after performing Audyssey Auto Setup. When
“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected,
illuminates.
• After running Audyssey Auto Setup, if the
Speaker Configuration, Distance, Channel
Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed
without increasing the number of speakers
measured, only illuminates.
• Pressing MULTEQ makes this setting.
NOTE
• “MultEQ XT” and “Manual” cannot be selected when “EQ Customize”
is set to “Not Used” (vpage81).
• When using headphones, “MultEQ XT” is automatically set to “OFF”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 74 2010/08/23 18:33:12
75
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Setting items Setting details
Dynamic Volume®
Solve the problem of large
variations in volume level
between TV, movies and
other content (between
quiet passages and
loud passages, etc.) by
automatically adjusting to
the user’s preferred volume
setting.
Heavy : Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
OFF : Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.
• is displayed when set to “ON”.
• If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in Auto
Setup (vpage11), the setting is automatically
changed to “Heavy”.
• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit
can be used for operations.
Press DYN EQ/VOL.
Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is
changed as shown below.
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Heavy
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : OFF
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Light
nA-DSX Soundstage Default settings are underlined.
Adjust Audyssey DSX™ setting and sound stage parameters.
Setting items Setting details
Audyssey DSX
Provides more immersive
surround sound by adding
the new channels.
ON-Height- : Turn on A-DSX processing for height
expansion.
ON-Wide- : Turn on A-DSX processing for wide
expansion.
OFF : Do not set Audyssey DSX.
• This can also be set by pressing A-DSX.
• The indicator illuminates on the display.
Audyssey DSX : ON -Height-
OFF Audyssey DSX : ON -Wide-
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting items Setting details
Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width
when using front wide
speakers.
–10 – +10 (0)
Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height
when using front height
speakers.
–10 – +10 (0)
• “Audyssey DSX” can be set when you are using front height speakers
or front wide speakers.
• “Audyssey DSX” is only valid when using a center speaker.
• “Audyssey DSX” is only enabled when the listening mode is set other
than STEREO, PLgz Height, MULTI CH STEREO, NEURAL, DOLBY VS,
DIRECT, PURE DIRECT.
• “A-DSX Soundstage” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being
played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the
respective channels are played back using the input signals.
About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX is a scalable surround expansion system that adds
new channels to improve the surround impression. Based on research
in human hearing Audyssey DSX adds a pair of Wide channels in the
front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic
soundstage.
Audyssey DSX then adds a pair of Height channels above the main
front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and
perceptual cues related to soundstage depth. In addition to creating
these new channels, Audyssey DSX applies Surround Envelopment
Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side/back
surround channels. The result is a much more seamless and enveloping
home theater experience.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 75 2010/08/23 18:33:12
76
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Audio/Video Adjust
nM-DAX Default settings are underlined.
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the
amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The M-DAX
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near
those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to
obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals.
Setting details
OFF : Do not use M-DAX.
LOW : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs.
MID : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources.
HIGH : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs.
• This item can be set with analog signals or when a PCM signal (fs = 44.1/48
kHz) is input.
• This cannot be set when the surround mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
• This item default setting is “OFF”.
• If a setting other than “OFF” is selected, the M-DAX indicator lights.
• Pressing M-DAX on the remote control unit or the main unit makes this setting.
OFF LOW MID
HIGH
nAudio Delay Default settings are underlined.
While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output.
Setting details
0ms – 200ms
• This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync” is set to “ON” and when
a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is connected.
• Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.
• Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage70) is set
to “Auto” or “Game”.
• This can also be set by pressing A.DELAY on the remote control unit.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
nManual EQ Default settings are underlined.
Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
“Manual EQ” can be set when “MultEQ XT” setting (vpage74) is “Manual”
Setting items Setting details
Adjust CH
Correct the tone of each
speaker.
q Select the speaker tone adjustment method.
All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together.
L/R : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together.
Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker.
w Select the speaker.
e Select the adjustment frequency band.
63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz
• Select the speakers you want to adjust when “L/R” or “Each” is
selected.
r Adjust the level.
–20.0dB – +6.0dB (0.0dB)
Base Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve
from MultEQ® XT.
Yes : Copy.
No : Do not copy.
“Base Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Auto Setup has
been performed.
Default
The “Manual EQ” settings
are returned to the default
settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 76 2010/08/23 18:33:13
77
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Audio/Video Adjust
Picture Adjust Default settings are underlined.
• This item can be set when the input source is BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV .
• With input sources other than the ones above, this item can be set when “Video Select” is selected. In
this case, the original input source settings are called out.
• Can be set when the “Video Convert” setting (vpage70) is “ON”.
• “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage69) or “Component” (vpage69) has been assigned.
Setting items Setting details
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
–6 – +6 (0)
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
0 – +12
Chroma Level
Adjust picture chroma level
(saturation).
–6 – +6 (0)
Hue
Adjust color hue.
–6 – +6 (0)
DNR
Reduce overall picture
noise.
OFF / Low / Mid / High
Enhancer
Emphasize picture contours.
0 – +12
• “DNR” and “Enhancer” are each effective with HDMI output.
• The value set at “Picture Adjust” is stored in the memory individually for each input source.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Manual Setup
Set when changing Audyssey® Auto Setup settings, or when changing the audio, video, display
or other settings.
• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible
to set MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ® and Dynamic Volume® (vpage74, 75).
• Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Menu operation
1Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplier operation
mode.
2Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3Press ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN.
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the Manual Setup procedure
Amp Assign
Speaker Config.
Bass Setting
Distance
Channel Level
Crossover Frequency
Assign surround back AMP for other use
MANUAL SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
RGB Range
Auto Lip Sync
HDMI Audio Out
Monitor Out
HDMI Control
Standby Source
Power Off Control
Normal
ON
AMP
Monitor 1
ON
Last
All
MANUAL SETUP
HDMI SETUP
Use video range from 16 (black) to 235 (white)
RETURN Return
7.1ch IN SW Level
EQ Customize
Set subwoofer playback level in 7.1ch IN mode
MANUAL SETUP
AUDIO SETUP
ZONE2 Setup
ZONE3 Setup
MANUAL SETUP
ZONE SETUP
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2
MANUAL SETUP
NETWORK SETUP
Make settings for wired LAN
Network Connecting
Other
Rhapsody Account
Napster Account
Network Information
Volume Control
Source Delete
GUI
Component 2 Output
Zone Rename
Trigger Out
Display
Setup Lock
MANUAL SETUP
OPTION SETUP
Make settings for volume control
Speaker Setup (vpage78)
Zone Setup (vpage83)Network Setup (vpage81) Option Setup (vpage84)
HDMI Setup (vpage80) Audio Setup (vpage81)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 77 2010/08/23 18:33:13
78
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
• When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide”
can be set to “Large”.
• When “Surround” is set to “None”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide”
can automatically set to “None”.
S.Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
• 2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers.
• 1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this
setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel.
Even when the “S.Back“ setting is other than “None”, sound may
not be emitted from the surround back speaker, depending on the
playback source.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage78) is other than “Normal”, you
cannot make the “S.Back” setting.
F.Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage78) is other than “Normal”, you
cannot make the “F.Height” setting.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Speaker Setup Default settings are underlined.
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Auto Setup.
• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible to select
MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume (vpage74, 75).
• Manual Setup can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
nAudio output from each PRE OUT terminal
PRE OUT Channel
UNBALANCED PRE
OUT terminal FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR HL/HR WL/WR
BALANCED PRE
OUT terminal FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR --- ---
Audio Output Front A Center
Subwoofer 1 /
Subwoofer 2
Surround Surround
Back*
Front Height /
Front B Front Wide
*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.
Setting items Setting details
Amp Assign
Set the speakers connected
to the UNBALANCED and
BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/
SBR terminals of the power
amp.
Normal : Set when using surround back, front height or front wide
speakers.
ZONE2 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE2.
ZONE3 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE3.
SPKR-C : Set for connecting the tweeter of the front speaker to the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of the
power amp, and the woofer of the front speaker to the FL/FR terminals.
Speaker Config.
Select speaker configuration
and size (bass reproduction
capability).
NOTE
Do not use the outward
shape of the speaker to
determine selection of a
“Large” or “Small” speaker.
Instead, use the frequencies
set in “Crossover
Frequency” (vpage80) as
the standard for determining
bass reproduction capability.
Front : Set the front speaker size.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “S.Back”,
“F.Height” and “F.Wide” can not be set to “Large”.
Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.
“Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”.
Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.
• Yes : Use a subwoofer.
• No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 78 2010/08/23 18:33:13
79
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
F.Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
• None : Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage78) is other than “Normal”, you
cannot make the “F.Wide” setting.
Bass Setting
Set subwoofer and LFE
signal range playback.
Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by
subwoofer.
• LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is
added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
• LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
• “Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”
(vpage78) is set to “Yes”.
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest
bass.
• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced
from the subwoofer.
NOTE
If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the
subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.
LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range.
• 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz
Distance
Set distance from listening
position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the
distance from the listening
position to each speaker.
Unit : Set the unit of distance.
• Feet / Meters
Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
• 1ft / 0.1ft
• 0.1m / 0.01m
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / Surround L / Surround R /
S.Back Lz / S.Back Rz / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L / F.Wide R
: Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage78) is set to
“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.
• 0.0ft – 60.0ft / 0.00m – 18.00m : Set the distance.
Manual Setup
Setting items Setting details
Distance
(Continued) • The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign”
(vpage78) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage78) settings.
• Default settings :
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L /
F.Wide R : 12.0 ft (3.6 m)
Surround L / Surround R / S.Back L / S.Back R : 10.0 ft (3.0 m)
• Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20
ft (6.0 m).
NOTE
Speakers set to “None” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage78) are not displayed.
Default : The “Distance” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Default Setting?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER.
Channel Level
Set the volume of the test
tone to be the same when it
is output from each speaker.
Test Tone Start : Output test tone.
• Front L / F.Height L / Center / F.Height R / Front R / F.Wide R /
Surround R / S.Back Rz / S.Back Lz / Surround L / F.Wide L /
Subwoofer : Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage78) is set to
“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.
• –12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the volume.
• When o is pressed while the subwoofer volume is set to “–12 dB”, the
“Subwoofer” setting switches to “OFF”.
• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the
surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different
surround modes, use the operation see page 56.
• When you press TEST TONE on the remote control unit, you can enter
this setting item immediately.
NOTE
• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Config.” (vpage78) settings
are not displayed.
• When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES jack of this unit, the
“Channel Level” is not displayed.
Default : The “Channel Level” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Default Setting?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 79 2010/08/23 18:33:14
80
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Manual Setup
HDMI Setup Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Setting items Setting details
RGB Range
Set the video range of RGB
output from the HDMI
connector.
Normal : Output with RGB video range (16 (black) to 235 (white)).
Enhanced : Output with RGB video range (0 (black) to 255 (white)).
This setting is active when using a TV equipped with a DVI terminal.
Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic
compensation for timing
shift in audio and video
output.
ON : Compensated.
OFF : Not compensated.
HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output
device.
AMP : Play back through speakers connected to this unit.
TV : Play back through TV connected to this unit.
When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV
audio setting (vpage55 “HDMI control function”).
Monitor Out
Make settings for HDMI
monitor output.
Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal is always used.
Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal is always used.
With “Resolution” (vpage70) not set to “Auto”, check whether
the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “HDMI
Information” – “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” and “HDMI Monitor 2
Information” (vpage88).
HDMI Control
You can link operations with
devices connected to HDMI
and compatible with HDMI
Control.
ON : Use HDMI control function.
OFF : Do not use HDMI control function.
• When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is
connected, set “HDMI Control” to “OFF”.
• Please consult the operating instructions for each connected component
to check the settings.
• Refer to “HDMI control function” (vpage55) for more information about
the HDMI control function.
NOTE
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby
power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
• “HDMI Control” does not work when the power to the equipment is off.
Either turn power on or set to standby.
• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible
with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are
connected when you perform HDMI control.
• If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the
power to connected devices after the change.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Setting items Setting details
Crossover Frequency
Set the maximum frequency
of the bass signal output
from each channel to
the subwoofer. Set the
Crossover Frequency to
suit the bass reproduction
capability of the speaker
being used.
Crossover : Set the crossover frequency.
• 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz
Advanced : Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.
• Front / Center / Surround / S.Back / F.Height / F.Wide : Select the
speaker.
• 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.
• “Crossover Frequency” can be set when the “Bass Setting” –
“Subwoofer Mode” (vpage79) setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you
have a speaker that is set to “Small”.
• Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small
speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to
a higher frequency.
• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency
is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
• The speakers that can be set when “Advanced” is selected differ
depending on to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage79).
• When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.”
can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
• If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the
speaker size.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 80 2010/08/23 18:33:14
81
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Setting items Setting details
Standby Source
Sets the HDMI input source
to put into standby when
the power is on.
Last : This item is set at the last-used input source.
HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4 / HDMI5 / HDMI6 : Put the respective
input source into standby.
“Standby Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.
Power Off Control
Links the power standby
of this unit to external
equipment.
All : If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input
source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video : If power to a connected TV is turned off when the input source
is BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV, power to this unit is
automatically set to standby.
OFF : This unit does not link with power to a TV.
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.
Audio Setup Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for audio playback.
Setting items Setting details
7.1ch IN SW Level
Setup playback method for
analog signals inputted from
7.1CH INPUT connectors.
Subwoofer Level : Set playback level of subwoofer signal input from the
7.1CH INPUT connector.
• +10dB : This is the recommended level.
• +15dB / +5dB / 0dB : Select the level according to the player being used.
EQ Customize
Set so that unused equalizer
settings are not displayed
when MULTEQ is pressed.
Audyssey Byp. L/R : Set when not using “Audyssey Byp. L/R” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Byp. L/R” settings can be made when
Audyssey® Auto Setup is performed.
Audyssey Flat : Set when not using “Audyssey Flat” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Flat” settings can be made when Audyssey
Auto Setup is performed.
Manual : Set when not using the “Manual” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Manual Setup
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Network Setup Default settings are underlined.
Make network settings.
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
Make settings for wired
LAN.
1. Connect the LAN cable (vpage24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
2. Turn on this unit (vpage7 “Turn on power”).
This unit performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the
setting in step 3.
3. Set the IP address at the “Network Connecting”.
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
Set IP address and proxy manually
RETURN Return
DHCP OFF
IP Address 192.168.100.19
Detail
Exit
ENTER Enter
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
Set IP address manually
RETURN Return
DHCP OFF
IP Address [192.168.100.019]
Subnet Mask [255.255.255.000]
Default Gateway [000.000.000.000]
Primary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Secondary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Exit
Proxy
qre
w
q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press
ENTER.
w Use o p to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press i.
The DHCP function is disabled.
e Use uip to input the address and press ENTER.
• IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255
• Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal
adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in
the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input
255.255.255.0.
• Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its
IP address.
• Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address
indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at
“Primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the
first one at “Secondary DNS”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 81 2010/08/23 18:33:14
82
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
(Continued)
r Use o p to select the proxy server input method, and then press i.
Address : Select when inputting by address.
Name : Select when inputting by domain name.
t Use uio p to input the proxy server address or domain name and
press ENTER.
When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address
When“Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name
• For character input, see page 65.
y Use uio p to input the proxy server port number and press ENTER.
u Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
Setup is complete.
Other
Network function on/off
setting during standby, and
PC language setting.
Network Standby : Set the network function on/off during standby.
• ON : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network
compatible controller.
• OFF : Suspend network function during standby.
Set to “ON” when using the web control function.
PC Language : Select computer environment language.
• ara / chi (smpl) / chi (trad) / cze / dan / dut / eng / fin / fre / ger / gre /
heb / hun / ita / jpn / kor / nor / pol / por / por(BR) / rus / spa / swe / tur
Friendly Name Edit : The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed
on the network. Up to 63 characters can be input. The default Friendly
Name on first use is “marantz:[AV7005]”.
• For character input, see page 65.
Default : Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Default Setting?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER.
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
(Continued)
r Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
Setup is complete.
• When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and
press ENTER (vpage82 “Proxy settings”).
• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need
to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP
function is set to “ON” in this unit’s default settings.
• If this unit is being used connected to a network without the DHCP
function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some
knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network
administrator.
• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and
settings (vpage24).
• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP
(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your
computer.
• When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press
RETURN.
Proxy settings : Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a
proxy server.
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
Set IP address and proxy manually
RETURN Return
DHCP ON
IP Address 192.168.100.19
Detail
Exit
ENTER Enter
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
Set if using proxy server
RETURN Return
DHCP ON
IP Address [192.168.100.019]
Subnet Mask [255.255.255.000]
Default gateway [000.000.000.000]
Primary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Secondary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Exit
Proxy
ENTER Enter
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
Proxy server is used
RETURN Return
Proxy ON
Proxy Address
Address [000.000.000.000]
Port [00000]
Exit
qw
u
t
r
y
e
q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press
ENTER.
w Use ui to set “Proxy” and press ENTER.
e Use o p to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press i.
The proxy server is enabled.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 82 2010/08/23 18:33:15
83
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Setting items Setting details
Other
(Continued)
Update Notification : Displays a notification message on this unit’s menu
screen when the latest firmware is released with “Firmware Update”. The
notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power
is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage24) when using this
function.
• ON : Display update message.
• OFF : Do not display update message.
• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message,
the “Check for Update” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more
information on “Firmware Update”)
• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.
Upgrade Notification : Display a notification message on this unit’s
menu screen when downloadable firmware is released with “Add New
Feature”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds
when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage24)
when using this function.
• ON : Display upgrade message.
• OFF : Do not display upgrade message.
• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message,
the “Add New Feature” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more
information on “Add New Feature”)
• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.
Rhapsody Account
Set or change Username
and Password (vpage42
“Listening to Rhapsody”).
Username / Password / Account Number / Merge / Clear
• For character input, see page 65.
Napster Account
Set or change Username
and Password (vpage39
“Listening to Napster”).
Username / Password
• For character input, see page 65.
Network Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / DHCP= ON/OFF / IP Address / MAC Address
Manual Setup
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Zone Setup Default settings are underlined.
Set the audio to play back with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).
Setting items Setting details
Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
Treble
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
HPF
Make settings for cutting
the low range to reduce
distortion in the bass.
ON : The low range is attenuated.
OFF : The low range is not attenuated.
Level Lch
Adjust the left channel
output level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The “Level Lch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage83) is set to
“Stereo“.
Level Rch
Adjust the right channel
output level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The “Level Rch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage83) is set to
“Stereo“.
Channel
Set the signal output from
multi-zone.
Stereo : Select stereo output.
Mono : Select mono output.
Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and remote control
unit.
–40dB (41) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
0dB (81) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
When “Amp Assign” (vpage78) is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”, the
“Volume Level” setting is automatically set to “Variable”.
Volume Limit
Make a setting for
maximum volume.
OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage83)
is “Variable”.
• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage84) is set
to “Absolute”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 83 2010/08/23 18:33:15
84
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Option Setup Default settings are underlined.
Make various other settings.
Setting items Setting details
Volume Control
Set the MAIN ZONE (room
where the unit is located)
volume setting.
Volume Display : Set how volume is displayed.
• Relative : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –80.5 dB – 18 dB.
• Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) – 99.
• The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Limit” and
“Power On Level” display method.
• The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones.
Volume Limit : Make a setting for maximum volume.
• OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
• –20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
Power On Level : Define the volume setting that is active when the
power is turned on.
• Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
• – – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
• –80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
Mute Level : Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
• Full : The sound is muted entirely.
• –40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
• –20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Source Delete
Remove from the display
input sources that are not
used.
BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / NET/USB /
TV / CD / CDR / PHONO / SIRIUS / HD Radio /
M-XPort : Select input source that is not used.
• ON : Use this source.
• Delete : Do not use this source.
NOTE
• Input sources being used in the various zones
cannot be deleted.
• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected
using SOURCE SEL.
GUI
Make the settings related to
displays on the TV screen.
Screensaver : Make screensaver settings.
• ON : The screensaver is activated during menu display, NET/USB, iPod,
SIRIUS or HD Radio screen display if no operation is performed for an
approximately 3-minute continuous period. When you press uio p,
the screensaver is cancelled and the screen before that screen saver
started is displayed.
• OFF : Screensaver is not activated.
Setting items Setting details
Power On Level
Define the volume setting
that is active when the
power is turned on.
Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
– – – (0) : Always mute when power is turned on.
–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage83)
is “Variable”.
• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage84) is set
to “Absolute”.
Mute Level
Set the amount of
attenuation when muting
is on.
Full : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 84 2010/08/23 18:33:15
85
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Setting items Setting details
GUI
(Continued)
Wall Paper : Set wallpaper to display in the background when playback
is stopped, etc.
• Picture : Set the background to a picture (Marantz logo).
• Black : Set the background to black.
Format : Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
• NTSC : Select NTSC output.
• PAL : Select PAL output.
“Format” can also be set by the
following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s A-DSX
and RETURN for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the
display.
2. Press o p and set the video signal
format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER, MENU
or RETURN to complete the setting.
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
Text : Display the details of operation when switching surround mode,
input mode, etc.
• ON : Turn display on.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Master Volume : Display the master volume during adjustment.
• Bottom : Display at the bottom.
• Top : Display at the top.
• OFF : Turn display off.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed
on movie subtitles, set to “Top”.
NET/USB : Set the NET/USB screen display time when the input source
is “NET/USB”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Manual Setup
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Setting items Setting details
GUI
(Continued)
TUNER : Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is
“SIRIUS” or “HD Radio”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
iPod : Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is “NET/
USB”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Component 2 Output
Set whether to use the
component 2 output
terminal as MAIN ZONE or
ZONE2.
MAIN ZONE : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output
for MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2 : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output for
ZONE2.
Zone Rename
Change the display title of
each zone to one you prefer.
• Up to 10 characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
Trigger Out
Select the condition for
activating Trigger Out 1/2 for
the input source, surround
mode, etc.
See “DC OUT (TRIGGER
OUT) jacks” (vpage54) for
more information on trigger
out.
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
nWhen setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set
to “ON”.
nWhen setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “ON” is selected.
Active for the zone set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone”.
nWhen setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is selected.
Active when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When Setting
for Zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with
“When Setting for Input Source” is selected.
• ON : Activate trigger on this mode.
• – – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Default : The “Trigger Out” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 85 2010/08/23 18:33:15
86
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Manual Setup
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
Setting items Setting details
Firmware Update
Update the firmware of this
unit.
Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check
approximately how long it will take to complete an update.
Start : Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
displayed.
When updating is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
• If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not
possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment,
then update again.
Display Description
Updating fail Updating failed.
Login failed Failure to log into server.
Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.
Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.
Add New Feature
Display new features that
can be downloaded to this
unit and perform an update.
Upgrade : Execute the upgrade process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
displayed.
When upgrading is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
• If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment, then update again.
Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by the
upgrade.
See the Marantz website for details about updates.
When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this
menu and updates can be carried out. If the procedure has not been
carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is
needed when carrying out the procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by
pressing and holding o and RETURN for at
least 3 seconds.
Setting items Setting details
Display
Set the display on/off
setting.
ON : Display is always on.
Display Auto OFF : Display is off except
when showing the status display.
Display OFF : Display is always off.
This can also be set by pressing
DISPLAY.
Each time DISPLAY is pressed, the
setting is changed as shown below.
ON Display Auto Off
Display OFF
Setup Lock
Protect settings from
inadvertent change.
ON : Turn protection on.
OFF : Turn protection off.
When canceling the setting, set “Setup Lock” to “OFF”.
NOTE
When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no
longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt
to operate related settings.
· Menu operations · Channel Level
· M-DAX · MultEQ® XT
· Dynamic Volume®· Dynamic EQ®
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving
maintenance from a Marantz
service engineer or custom
installer.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or
installer.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 86 2010/08/23 18:33:16
87
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Manual Setup
Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and “Add New Feature”
• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a
broadband Internet connection (vpage24).
• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed.
• Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/
upgrading procedure to be completed.
• Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/
upgrading is completed.
• Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc. set
for this unit.
• The following backup data may be erased after an update or upgrade.
• Internet radio preset channel
• Internet radio Recently Played data
• Username registered for Flickr Contact
• Data in Internet radio, media server and USB memory device
• If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ON/STANDBY on the main unit for
more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update retry” appears
on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error
continues despite this, check the network environment.
• Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on
the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.
• When usable new firmware is released with “Firmware Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification
message is displayed on the menu screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Update Notification”
(vpage83) and “Upgrade Notification” (vpage83) to “OFF”.
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 87 2010/08/23 18:33:16
88
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Information
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
Items Setting details
Status
Show information about
current settings.
nMAIN ZONE
This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.
The information displayed differs according to the input source.
Select Source / Name / Surround Mode / Input Mode /
Decode Mode / HDMI / Digital / Component / Video Select /
Video Mode / Content Type / Video Convert / i/p Scaler /
Resolution / Progressive Mode / Aspect etc.
nZONE2
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level
nZONE3
This item shows information about settings for ZONE3.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level
Audio Input Signal
Show information about
audio input signals.
Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode.
Signal : The input signal type.
fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, LFE).
Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back
channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix
signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.
Dialogue normalization function
This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital
sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
The correction value can be checked using the STATUS.
The figure is the corrected value.
This cannot be changed.
Items Setting details
HDMI Information
Show information about
HDMI input/output signals
and monitor.
HDMI Signal Information
• Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 Information / HDMI Monitor 2 Information
• Interface / Supported resol.
“HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI Monitor 2 Information”
displays information on the HDMI monitor currently being used.
Preset Channel
Show information about
preset channels.
NET/USB SIRIUS
HD Radio
A / B / C / D / E / F / G
A1 – A8 / B1 – B8 / C1 – C8 / D1 – D8 / E1 – E8 / F1 – F8 / G1 – G8
Remote control operation
buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right) Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 88 2010/08/23 18:33:16
89
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Other settings
Remote control settings
• When you connect a remote control receiver unit (purchased
separately) to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of this unit, use
the following procedure to disable the remote sensor function of
this unit.
• The remote sensor function of remote control signals is enabled by
default.
STATUS ENTER
ON/STANDBY
nDisabling the sensor function of the remote
control unit
When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/
STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on
the main unit.
“Remote Lock:ON” is shown on the display, and the infrared light
receiving function is disabled.
nEnabling the remote sensor function
When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/
STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on
the main unit.
The infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.
NOTE
If a remote control receiver unit (purchased separately) is not
connected, do not perform this setting. If you do, you will not be able
to operate this unit using the remote control unit.
Switches light illumination on/off
You can switch the lighting around the main display on or off.
• The factory setting is “ON”.
DISPLAY
Press and hold DISPLAY on the main unit for 3 seconds.
• Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings
again.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 89 2010/08/23 18:33:16
90
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit
Registering the supplied preset codes in the remote control unit
enables you to operate devices made by other manufacturers.
Operating AV equipment
1Press the input source select
button (vpage 25).
The remote control operating mode
switches as shown in the table below,
and the mode name is shown in the
remote control display.
NOTE
Press the input source select buttons once
to switch the operation mode of the remote
control unit supplied with this unit.
Press the input source select buttons twice
consecutively to switch the operation mode
of the remote control unit and input source
of this unit.
Input
source
select
buttons
Input source
of this unit
Devices controllable with the remote
control unit
(Operation mode)
zBD Device registered on the BD button
zDVD Device registered on the DVD button
VCR Device registered on the VCR button
zSAT
Device registered on the
SAT
button
GAME Device registered on the GAME button
AUX1 Device registered on the AUX1 button
NET/USB
• Network function
• iPod or USB memory device connected
to the USB port
zTV Device registered on the TV button
zCD Device registered on the CD button
CDR Device registered on the CDR button
SIRIUS SIRIUS Satellite Radio
HD Radio HD Radio receiver
M-XPort Device registered on the M-XP button
z If a preset code is registered for this button, the remote control
unit of this unit can control another devices.
NOTE
If the mode of the remote control unit is set to other than amp-
operation mode, press AMP to switch the remote control unit to the
amp-operation mode to perform the following operations:
• For menu operation by pressing MENU
• For setting the channel level of the unit by pressing CH LVL
• For performing direct playback
• For switching Audyssey DSX™, MultEQ XT®, Dynamic EQ® and
Dynamic Volume® settings.
• For using the Video Select function.
• For using the sleep timer function.
• For displaying the Source Select screen.
• For switching the M-DAX function.
• For directly selecting “AUTO” and “STEREO” of the listening
modes.
2Operate this unit or the device whose input source is
switched.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for each device.
For operations of iPod and HD Radio receiver, see the following
pages.
• iPod (vpage28)
• HD Radio receiver (vpage34)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 90 2010/08/23 18:33:17
91
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Registering preset codes
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit,
it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD
players or TVs made by different manufacturers.
NOTE
• No preset codes other than BD, DVD, TV, SAT and CD can be
registered.
• In the factory settings, remote control codes for all Marantz products
are registered.
nButtons used for operating the devices
q SOURCE ON/OFF
For switching power of each device on or off.
w uio p, ENTER
For menu operation of each device.
e MENU, SETUP, TOP MENU
For displaying the menu of each device.
r 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9
t Number button (0 – 9, +10)
y PRESET +, PRESET –
u TV POWER, TV INPUT
For operating a TV.
This button is enabled in any mode.
For details on operation with the remote control unit, see pages
28 – 43, 92.
Registering preset codes
The following two methods can be used for registering the reset
code.
q Entering a 4-digit code
w Scanning the code table
q Entering a 4-digit code
See the preset code list table for the code to be input.
1Press and hold down the input
source select buttons for the
appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks
twice.
The back light flashes.
2Press the 4-digit code for the
appliance using the numeric
buttons (code table at the end of
this book).
• The 4-digit code is shown in the remote
control display.
• When the settings are complete, “OK”
is shown in the remote control display.
• If “NG” is displayed in the remote control
display, repeat steps 1 and 2, and enter the
same code again.
w Scanning the code table
1Switch the power on of the device
for which you want to set the
preset code.
2Press and hold down the input
source select buttons for the
appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks
twice.
The back light flashes.
3Aim the remote control at the
appliance and slowly alternate
between pressing INPUT d
and SOURCE ON/OFF for the
appliance.
The preset code is shown in the remote
control display.
4Stop when the appliance turns off.
5Press ENTER once to lock in the code.
Check the registered preset code
1Press and hold down the
input source select buttons for
appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks twice
and back light ashes.
The back light flashes.
2Press SEARCH/INFO.
The display flashes twice, after which
the set code is shown for 3 seconds in
the remote control display.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 91 2010/08/23 18:33:17
92
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Default settings for preset codes
The devices shown below are registered for each input source button
as default. Settings can be changed according to the devices to be
used.
1Press and hold down the
input source select buttons for
appliance to control and press
SET until indicator blinks
twice.
The back light flashes.
2Enter the appropriate preset code
(4 digits) from the table below.
The display flashes twice.
Input source
select
buttons
Category Preset
code
Blu-ray Disc
player 5000
DVD player 2000
Television 1000
Satellite set
top box 4000
CD player 3000
NOTE
After this procedure, the selected source
reset to its initial code.
Operating components
The supplied remote control unit can control a component other than
this unit.
1Switch the input source
(vpage 25).
2Operate the component.
• For details, refer to the component’s
operating instructions.
nBlu-ray Disc player / HD-DVD player /
DVD player / DVD recorder operation
Operation buttons Function
SOURCE ON/OFF Power on/standby
MENU (Popup) Menu
TOP MENU Top menu
uio pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
6 7 Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1Playback
8 9 Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
0 – 9 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
CLR Clear the inputting
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
nCD player / CD recorder operation
Operation buttons Function
SOURCE ON/OFF Power on/off
6 7 Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1Playback
8 9 Auto search (cue)
3Pause
2Stop
CLR Clear the inputting
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
nTV operation
Operation buttons Function
SOURCE ON/OFF TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
CHANNEL +, – Switch channels (up/down)
CLR Clear the inputting
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Registering preset codes
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 92 2010/08/23 18:33:18
93
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Operating learn function
• If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not
operate even when the preset code is registered, use the learning
function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered
for use by the Marantz remote control included with this device.
• This remote control unit is capable of learning around 160 codes.
Remembering remote control codes from
other devices
1Place the Marantz remote control and remote control
from the other device approximately 5 cm apart,
with the remote control signal transmission sections
facing each other.
5 cm
2Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
indicator blinks.
3Press input source select buttons
to select the input source.
The input source is shown in the remote
control display.
4Select the button to be learned.
LEARN indicator lights up.
5Press and hold the button that you want to register
on the other remote control until “OK” is displayed
on the Marantz remote control display.
• If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 5
again. If “NG” is shown again on the remote control display, the
remote control may not be able to learn the code correctly. In this
case, use the specialized remote control for the device.
• If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown
on the remote control display. If you want to learn the code, you
should erase other learned button.
6Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the
same input source.
7Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other input sources.
8When programming of the remote control unit is
completed, press SET.
The LEARN display disappears, and the remote control unit
exits learn mode.
NOTE
• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE ON/OFF, MACRO
and HDMI in any mode.
• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons in TUNER mode,
AMP mode, NET/USB mode and M-XP mode.
• The learning procedure does not operate correctly if the batteries
have become worn.
• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the
LEARN mode, the remote control unit automatically exits from the
LEARN mode.
nSet top box for satellite (SAT) operation
Operation buttons Function
SOURCE ON/OFF Power on/standby
CHANNEL +, – Switch channels (up/down)
uio pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
0 – 9 Channel selection
CLR Clear the inputting
TV POWER TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
TV INPUT Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Operating components
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 93 2010/08/23 18:33:20
94
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Operating learn function
nDelete remote control codes for all input
sources
1Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
indicator blinks.
2Press and hold down HDMI and
press ON and STANDBY .
LEARN indicator lights.
3Press ENTER to continue erasing.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote
control display, and the mode returns
to learning mode.
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not
press ENTER and simply press any other
button.
• To return the normal mode, press SET.
NOTE
Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave
empty if the button has no factory preset code.
Delete saved remote control codes
Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all
memory contents.
nDelete remote control codes for each button
1Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
indicator blinks.
2Press input source select buttons
to select the input source you
want to delete.
The input source is shown in the remote
control display.
3Press and hold down HDMI and
press the learned button to be
erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control
display, and the mode returns to learning
mode.
• To return the normal mode, press SET.
nDelete remote control codes for each input
source
1Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN
indicator blinks.
2Press and hold down HDMI and
press the learned input source
select buttons to be erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control
display.
3Press ENTER to continue erasing.
The indicator blinks twice and the
mode returns to LEARN mode.
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not
press ENTER, and simply press any other
button.
• To return the normal mode, press SET.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 94 2010/08/23 18:33:20
95
Basic versionSimple version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Advanced version
Operating macro function
• When the macro function is used, operations that usually require a
complicated series of multiple button operations can be performed
easily just by pressing the MACRO button.
• This device can remember up to 6 macro functions.
• Each macro can record a maximum of 10 steps.
[Example] To playback a DVD
q Turn this unit’s power on
↓
w Switch this unit's input source to DVD
↓
e Turn the TV’s power on
↓
r DVD Playback
Recording macro operations
[Example] Recording DVD playback operations to the number “1”
button
1Press and hold SET and MACRO
together until “MACRO”
ashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
2Press the macro operation
number (“1”) that you want to
record to.
“M1-01” is shown in the remote control
display.
• If the number that you want to record to
has already been recorded to, the recorded
number flashes in the display.
3Press the input source switch
button (“DVD”) of the operation
that you want to record along
with the command button (“1”).
The macro operation step number is
shown in the remote control display.
• To record the amp input source, press AMP first, followed by the
input source switching button.
4When the macro operation recording is complete,
press and hold ENTER until the LEARN indicator
and MACRO indicator switch off.
NOTE
The RETURN, uio p, ENTER, VOLUME +, – and CLR buttons cannot
be recorded as macro operations.
Checking recorded macro operations
[Example] Checking the recorded macro operations to button “1”
1Press and hold MACRO and
MENU together until “MACRO”
ashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
2Press the number button (“1”)
that you want to check.
The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator
and “M1-01” flashes in the remote
control display.
3Press the VOLUME +, –.
• The LEARN indicator switches off,
and “M1-01” is shown in the remote
control display.
• The recorded macro operation is
performed.
4Repeat step 3 until the nal number of the macro
operation is displayed.
• The display returns to that of step 1.
• When the macro operation number is displayed, the
corresponding macro operation is performed.
5When the macro operation check is complete, press
and hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches
off.
Editing recorded macro operations
[Example] Changing macro operation “1” recorded on number button
“1” to “3”, and changing the number button to“2”
1Press and hold MACRO and
MENU together until “MACRO”
ashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
2Press the number button (“1”)
that you want to change.
The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator
and “M1-01” flashes in the remote
control display.
3Press ui to select the macro
operation button (“2”) to edit.
After the macro operation button is
displayed, the recorded operation is
performed.
• When the macro operation is updated as a recorded step, press
the input source switching button, and then press the new step
button (“2”).
• To insert a new macro operation between recorded steps, after
performing step 3, press MEMORY and then press the new step
button (“2”).
When a new step is introduced, if the total number of steps is
already 10, the 10th step is deleted after the new step is introduced.
• To delete recorded macro operations, after step 3, call the step
number that you want to delete, and press CLR.
• To return to step 1, press ENTER.
4When the macro operation edit is complete, press and
hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 95 2010/08/23 18:33:21
96
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Using macro operations
[Example] Using the recorded macro operations to button “1”
1Press the MACRO.
“MACRO” is shown in the MACRO
indicator and remote control display.
2Press the number button (“1”)
that you want to use.
Macro operations recorded to number
button “1” are performed one at a time.
• The step number shown in the remote
control display disappears after the step is
performed.
• When all macro operations are completed,
the remote control returns to the amp
operation mode.
Deleting recorded macro operations
[Example] Deleting the macro operations recorded to button“2”
1Press and hold MACRO and
MENU together until “MACRO”
ashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote
control display.
2Press and hold CLR and the
number (“2”) that you want
to delete for approximately 3
seconds.
“M2-CL” flashes in the remote control
display.
3Press the ENTER.
The recorded macro operation is deleted,
and the remote control returns to step 1.
• To cancel the macro delete operation, press
a different button without pressing ENTER.
4When the macro operation delete is complete,
press and hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator
switches off.
Adjusting the interval time of macro operations
transmitting
The macro operation transmission interval can be adjusted.
• The factory setting is “1 second”.
1Press and hold MACRO and
SOURCE SEL until “SETUP”
is shown in the remote control
display.
“SETUP” is shown for 3 seconds in
the remote control display, after which
“MCR05z” is displayed.
z The current transmission interval is
shown.
2Press o p to change to the desired transmission
interval.
• The interval time can be changed from 0.5 to 5 seconds by 0.5
seconds step.
3When the adjustment is complete, press and hold
ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.
Operating macro function Setting the back light
Press the Light button on the side of the remote control, and the
buttons on the remote control light for 2 seconds. If the Light button
is pressed while the buttons are lit, the buttons remain lit for another
2 seconds.
• Backlight is set on in the factory settings.
nDisabling the backlight
Press and hold both SET and
STANDBY until indicator ashes
twice.
nTurning the backlight on
Press and hold both SET and ON
until indicator ashes twice.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 96 2010/08/23 18:33:21
Information
97
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version Information
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
97
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version Information
F Part names and functions vpage98
F Other information vpage103
F Troubleshooting vpage112
F Specifications vpage116
F Index vpage117
Information
Here, we list various information related to this unit.
Please refer to this information as needed.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 97 2010/08/23 18:33:22
98
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Front panel
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
q w e
ru ty
q Power operation button
(ON/STANDBY) ······································(7, 12)
Turns power to this unit on and off (standby).
w Power indicator ·········································· (12)
e Door
When you are using buttons and/or terminals
behind the door, press the bottom of the door
to open it. When not using buttons and/or
terminals behind the door, close it. Be careful
not to catch your fingers when closing the door.
r VOLUME control knob ······························· (26)
t Remote control sensor ···························· (102)
y Main display ················································ (99)
u INPUT SELECTOR knob ····························· (25)
Part names and functions
GWith the door openH
W3
i o Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3
E3W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 E0 E1W4 E2
Q5W0W1 Q9W2 Q4Q7 Q6Q8
i Headphones jack
When the headphones are plugged into this
jack, audio will no longer be output from the
connected speakers or from the PRE OUT
connectors.
NOTE
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume
level excessively when using headphones.
o SETUP MIC jack ······································ (9, 52)
Q0 iPod/USB port ············································ (20)
Q1 HDMI connector ·········································· (16)
Q2 DIGITAL connector ····································· (19)
Q3 AUX1 INPUT connectors ··························· (19)
Q4 RETURN button ·································· (64 – 66)
Q5 ENTER button ····································· (64 – 66)
Q6 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·················· (64 – 66)
Q7 MENU button ·············································· (66)
Q8 Sub display ················································· (99)
Q9 Audyssey DSX™ button (A-DSX) ············· (75)
W0 M-DAX button / indicator ·························· (76)
W1 PURE DIRECT button / indicator ··············· (46)
W2 Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® button
(DYNAMIC EQ/VOL) ··································· (74)
W3 SURROUND MODE button ························ (44)
W4 AUTO button ································ (44, 60, 115)
W5 DISPLAY button ···································· (60, 86)
W6 STATUS button ·········································· (88)
W7 Speaker A/B switching button
(SPKR A/B) ·················································· (26)
W8 HDMI OUT button ······································ (16)
W9 ZONE SELECT button ································ (62)
E0 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ······························ (62)
E1 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ······························ (62)
E2 SLEEP button ·············································· (56)
E3 BAND button ·············································· (32)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 98 2010/08/23 18:33:22
99
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Sub Display
uiQ2
Q4
Q5Q6 oQ0Q1Q3
wq e
r
r yt
q Input signal indicators
w Input signal channel indicators
These light when digital signals are input.
When playing HD Audio sources, the indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back or LFE channel) is input.
If there are two or more extension channels, the and
indicators light.
e Information display
The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
r Surround back/front height/front wide channel indicators
When audio is output from the surround back channels, the “SB”,
“SBL” or “SBR” indicator lights. When audio is output from the
front height channels, the “H” indicator lights. When audio is
output from the front wide channels, the “W” indicator lights.
t Front speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
y Monitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting.
u Master volume indicator
i MUTE indicator
This lights when the mute mode is select (vpage26).
o AUDYSSEY indicators
Lighting is as follows, depending on the setting of “Dynamic EQ®”
(vpage74) and “Dynamic Volume®” (vpage75).
When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are
“ON”.
When “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” and “Dynamic
Volume” is “OFF”.
When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are
“OFF”.
Q0 Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage56).
Q1 Multi-zone indicators
This lights up when ZONE2, ZONE3 (separate room) power is
turned on (vpage62).
Q2 Input mode indicators
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources (vpage71).
Q3 HDMI indicator
This lights when playing using HDMI connections.
Q4 Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “HD Radio”.
STEREO : In the FM mode, this light when receiving stereo
broadcasts.
TUNED : Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
AUTO : This light when in the auto tuning mode.
Q5 Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are operating.
Q6 HD indicator
This light during HD Radio reception.
Display
Main Display
wq e
q Light illumination
When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding
area is lit blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not
switch on (vpage89 “Switches light illumination on/off”).
w Master volume indicator
e Input source indicator
The currently selected input source name is displayed.
If the input source name has been changed using “Input Setup” –
“Rename” (vpage71) in the menu, the input source name after
the change is displayed.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 99 2010/08/23 18:33:23
100
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Rear panel
See the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Q8
q w uyr te
Q6 Q4
Q7 i
Q5 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 o
Q7
q RS-232C connector ·································································· (54)
w HD Radio antenna terminals ·················································· (22)
e Analog audio connectors ···········································(17 – 21, 23)
r UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminals ········································· (6)
t 7.1CH INPUT connectors ························································ (23)
y BALANCED PRE OUT terminals ··············································· (6)
u AC inlet (AC IN) ·········································································· (7)
i COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ····································(17 – 19)
o HDMI connectors ····································································· (16)
Q0 Digital audio connectors ··················································(17 – 21)
Q1 NETWORK connector ······························································ (24)
Q2 FLASHER IN jack
Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to
control this unit.
Q3 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ······················································· (53)
Q4 M-XPort jack ············································································ (23)
Q5 SIRIUS connector ···································································· (22)
Q6 DC OUT jacks ··········································································· (54)
Q7 VIDEO connectors ····························································(17 – 19)
Q8 SIGNAL GND terminal ···························································· (21)
NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 100 2010/08/23 18:33:24
101
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Remote control unit
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
e
r
y
t
w
q
i
Q0
o
u
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q8
Q9
W3
W2
W5
W7
W6
W8
R4
R5
W0
W1
W4
Q7
E9
E8W9
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
R0
R1
R2
R3
qwe r
q Display
q LEARN indicator ·······································(93)
w MACRO indicator ······································ (95)
e Information display
r indicator ················································· (91)
w SOURCE power button ·················· (62, 92, 93)
e SET button ······································ (91, 93, 95)
r HDMI button ········································· (16, 94)
t Input mode button (A/D) ··························· (71)
y Input source select buttons ······················· (25)
u Source select button (SOURCE SEL) ········ (25)
i INPUT buttons (d, f) ····················· (25, 62, 91)
o DISPLAY/
Tuner mode (T.MODE) button ············ (32, 86)
Q0 SHIFT/TOP MENU button ·············· (33, 36, 65)
Q1 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·················· (64 – 66)
Q2 MENU button ·············································· (66)
Q3 MACRO button ··········································· (95)
Q4 Number buttons ······················· (33, 36, 91, 95)
Q5 Clear button (CLR) ······································ (96)
Q6 TUNING buttons (+, –) ······························· (32)
Q7 Remote control signal transmitter
Q8 Power buttons (ON, STANDBY) ············ (7, 12)
Q9 Speaker A/B button (SPKR A/B) ··············· (26)
W0 TEST TONE button ····································· (79)
W1 Muting button (MUTE) ······························ (26)
W2 Light button ················································ (96)
W3 Master volume control buttons
(VOLUME +, –)· ··········································· (26)
W4 Surround mode (SURR.) /
MEMORY button ···························· (33, 36, 44)
W5 SEARCH/
Information (INFO) button ·······(27, 31, 33, 66)
W6 ENTER button ····································· (64 – 66)
W7 RETURN button ·································· (64 – 66)
W8 System buttons
························· (28, 29, 36 – 38, 40, 42, 43, 92)
• Pause button (3)
• Play button (1)
• Stop button (2)
• Skip buttons (8, 9)
• Search buttons (6, 7)
FM/AM band switching button (BAND) ··· (34)
W9 STEREO button ··········································· (46)
E0 AUTO buttons ······························· (44, 60, 115)
E1 MULTEQ® button ······································· (74)
E2 Audio delay button (A.DELAY) ·················· (76)
E3 M-DAX button ············································ (76)
E4 Channel level button (CH LVL) ·················· (56)
E5 SLEEP button ·············································· (56)
E6 INSERT button ············································ (65)
E7 DELETE button ··········································· (65)
E8 Pure direct button (P.DIRECT) ··················· (46)
E9 REPEAT button ····································· (28, 29)
R0 RANDOM button ·································· (28, 29)
R1 Audyssey DSX button (A-DSX) ················· (75)
R2 Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® button
(DYN EQ/VOL) ······································ (74, 75)
R3 Video select button (V.SEL) ······················ (69)
R4 TV operation buttons
(TV POWER / INPUT) ··························· (92, 93)
R5 CHANNEL/
PRESET buttons (+, –) ·············· (33, 36, 92, 93)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 101 2010/08/23 18:33:25
102
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
30°
30°
Approx. 23 ft / 7 m
NOTE
The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not
operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,
strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared
light.
Remote control unit
Inserting the batteries
q Remove the rear lid in the
direction of the arrow and
remove it.
w Load the two batteries
properly as indicated by
the marks in the battery
compartment.
R03/AAA
e Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
• Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit.
• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate
even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The
supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.)
• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,
following the q and w marks in the battery compartment.
• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
• Do not use two different types of batteries.
• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
• Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in
places with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in
use for long periods.
• Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local
regulations regarding battery disposal.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 102 2010/08/23 18:33:25
103
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Other information
nTrademark information (vpage103)
nSurround (vpage104)
nRelationship between video signals and monitor
output (vpage108)
nExplanation of terms (vpage109)
Trademark information
This product uses the following technologies:
Manufactured under license from
Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey
MultEQ® XT is a registered trademark
of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® is a registered
trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® is a
registered trademark of Audyssey
Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic
Surround Expansion™ is a trademark
of Audyssey Laboratories.
DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA
CERTIFIED® are trademarks, service
marks, or certifi cation marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.
Device Class: DMP (Digital Media
Player)
DLNA Certifi ed® Product Function:
FINDS, PLAYS
Content Type: audio, images, videos
(Check supported media formats.)
DLNA consumer website: www.dlna.
org
Some content may not be compatible
with other DLNA Certifi ed® products
(example: optional media formats)
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S.
and worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks, & DTS-HD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks,
& DTS Neural Surround and the DTS
logos are trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-
Defi nition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks
of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United
States and other countries.
HD Radio™ Technology
Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the
HD Radio logo are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for
iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to
connect specifi cally to iPod, or
iPhone, respectively, and has been
certifi ed by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the
operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod shuffl e, and iPod touch are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
• Individual users are permitted to
use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic,
iPod nano, iPod shuffl e, and iPod
touch for private copy and playback
of non-copyrighted contents and
contents whose copy and playback
is permitted by law. Copyright
infringement is prohibited by law.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All
rights reserved.
Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected
by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 103 2010/08/23 18:33:26
104
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Surround
This unit is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Surround modes and parameters
This table shows the speakers that can be used in each surround mode and the surround parameters adjustable in each surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage78).
Surround mode (vpage44)
Channel output Surround Parameter (vpage73)
Front
L/R Center Surround
L/R
Surround back
L/R
Front height
L/R
Front wide
L/R Subwoofer
HT-EQ
z5
(vpage73)
DRC
z6
(vpage73)
D. Comp
z7
(vpage73)
LFE
z8
(vpage73)
PURE DIRECT (2channel) S Dz4S S
PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel) S D D Dz1Dz1Dz1D S S S
DIRECT (2channel) S Dz4S S
DIRECT (Multi-channel) S D D Dz1Dz1Dz1D S S S
STEREO S DSSSS
MULTI CH IN SDDD DS S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gzSDD D DSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gxSDDD DSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g SDD DSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S D D Dz2Dz3DSSS
DTS NEO:6 SDDD DSSS
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX S D D Dz2Dz3DSSS
Audyssey DSX S D D Dz2Dz3DSSSS
DOLBY DIGITAL SDDDD DS SS
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus SDDDD DS SS
DOLBY TrueHD SDDDD DSS S
DTS SURROUND SDDDD DS SS
DTS 96/24 SDDDD DS SS
DTS-HD SDDDD DS SS
DTS Express SDDDD DS SS
MULTI CH STEREO SDDD DS SS
NEURAL SDDD DS
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER S D S
DOLBY HEADPHONE S
z1 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z2 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage75) is set to “ON–Height–”, sound is output from the front height speakers.
z3 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage75) is set to “ON–Wide–”, sound is output from the front wide speakers.
z4 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage79), sound is output from the subwoofer.
z5 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z6 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.
z7 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is played.
z8 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 104 2010/08/23 18:33:26
105
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Surround
Surround mode (vpage44)
Surround Parameter (vpage73)
Tone
z9
(vpage73)
Audyssey Settingsz10 (vpage74) Audyssey DSX™
Soundstage
z10
(vpage75)
M-DAX
z13
(vpage76)
Height Gain
(vpage73)
PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only NEO:6 Music mode
only
Panorama
(vpage73)
Dimension
(vpage73)
C.Width
(vpage73)
C.Image
(vpage73)
MultEQ® XT
(vpage74)
Dynamic EQ®
z11
(vpage74)
Dynamic Volume®
z12
(vpage75)
PURE DIRECT (2 channel)
PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
DIRECT (2 channel)
DIRECT (Multi-channel)
STEREO SSSS S
MULTI CH IN SSSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gzS S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gxSSS SSSSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g SSS SSSSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX SSS SSSSSS
DTS NEO:6 SSSSSSS
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX SSSSSSS
Audyssey DSX SSSSS
DOLBY DIGITAL SSSSS
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus SSSSS
DOLBY TrueHD SSSSS
DTS SURROUND SSSSS
DTS 96/24 SSSSS
DTS-HD SSSSS
DTS Express SSSSS
MULTI CH STEREO SSSS S
NEURAL SSSS S
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER SSSS S
DOLBY HEADPHONE SSSS S
z9 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage74) is set to “ON”.
z10 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z11 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ XT” (vpage74) is set to “OFF” or “Manual”.
z12 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage74) is set to “OFF”.
z13 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 105 2010/08/23 18:33:26
106
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Surround
nTypes of input signals, and corresponding surround modes
This table shows the input signal that can be played in each surround mode. Check the audio signal of the input source then select the surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the selectable surround mode.
Surround mode (vpage44) NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL
LINEAR PCM
(multi ch)
LINEAR PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch) DTS 96/24 DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DTS SURROUND
DTS-HD MSTR z5S
DTS-HD HI RES z5S
DTS ES DSCRT6.1 z1z3S
DTS ES MTRX6.1 z1z3S
DTS SURROUND z5SSS
DTS 96/24 z5S
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MOVIE z2z3SSSSSSS
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC z1z3SSSSSSS
DTS (–HD) + PLgzz4SSSSSSS
DTS EXPRESS z5S
DTS (–HD) + NEO:6 z1z3SSS SSS
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA z5S S S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC z5S S S
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA A-DSX S S S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC A-DSX S S S
Audyssey DSX SSSSSSS
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY TrueHD z5S
DOLBY DIGITAL+ z5S
DOLBY DIGITAL EX z1z3SSSS
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX z1z3S S
DOLBY DIGITAL z5SSSS
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MOVIE z2z3SSSSSS
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC z1z3SSSSSS
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgzz4SSSSSS
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MOVIE z1z3S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC z1z3S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME z1z3S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gzz4S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MOVIE z5S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC z5S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME z5S S S
z1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage78) is set to “Normal”.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage75) setting is set to “ON”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 106 2010/08/23 18:33:26
107
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Surround
Surround mode (vpage44) NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL
LINEAR PCM
(multi ch)
LINEAR PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch) DTS 96/24 DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MOVIE A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME A-DSX S S S
Audyssey DSX SSSSSS
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER SS S SSSSSSSSSSSSSS
DOLBY HEADPHONE SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN z5S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MOVIE z2z3S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MUSIC z1z3S
MULTI CH IN + PLgzz4S
MULTI CH IN + Dolby EX z3S
MULTI CH IN 7.1 z3 S (7.1)
Audyssey DSX S
DIRECT
DIRECT SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
MULTI CH STEREO SS S SSSS SSSSS
STEREO
STEREO SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
NEURAL
NEURAL S S S
AUTO
AUTO SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
z1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage78) is set to “Normal”.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage75) setting is set to “ON”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 107 2010/08/23 18:33:26
108
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT
Video Convert Input Signals Output Signals Menu displayed
HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO
1ON AAAWall paper A A Only the menu is
displayed
A z2A
2OFF AAA AAA A z2A
3ON A A S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO S (VIDEO) A (VIDEO) z3A (VIDEO)
4ON AS (1080p) A
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
A
S (COMPONENT)
A (COMPONENT) z2
A
5ON AS (1080i ~ 480p) AAA (COMPONENT) z3
6ON AS (480i/576i) AA
7ON AS (1080p) S
VIDEO
A (COMPONENT)
A (VIDEO)
8ON z1AS (1080p) S––S (VIDEO)
9ON AS (1080i ~ 480p) S
COMPONENT S (COMPONENT) A (COMPONENT) z3
10 ON AS (480i/576i) S
11 ON S A A
HDMI
A A
S (HDMI)
A z2A
12 ON SAS AVIDEO A (VIDEO)
13 ON S S A
COMPONENT AA (COMPONENT) z2A
14 ON SSS VIDEO A (VIDEO)
15 OFF A A S A A VIDEO
Only the menu is
displayed
A z2A (VIDEO)
16 OFF ASA ACOMPONENT AA (COMPONENT) z2A
17 OFF A S S AVIDEO A (VIDEO)
18 OFF S A A
HDMI
A A A z2A
19 OFF SAS AVIDEO A (VIDEO)
20 OFF S S A
COMPONENT AA (COMPONENT) z2A
21 OFF SSS VIDEO A (VIDEO)
S Video signal input present
A No video signal input
z1 When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on
A No video signal output S ( ) Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ).
A ( ) Only the picture in ( ) is output.
A Neither the picture nor the menu is output.
z2 Only the menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is
connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on.
z3 If an HDMI monitor is not connected or power of an HDMI
monitor is not turned on, the menu is superimposed on a video
image in parenthesis.
ZONE2 MONITOR OUT
• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and
PAL-60.
• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video and Video connectors.
• The menu display cannot be superimposed when x.v.Color signals and computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is
not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
Input Signals Output Signals
COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO
1AAAA
2ASAS
3SASA
4SSSS
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 108 2010/08/23 18:33:27
109
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Explanation of terms
A
A2DP
A2DP is one profile of Bluetooth definded for
in-car devices or AV devices that use wireless
communication instead of a cable.
Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(A-DSX)
Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the
ability of audio systems to match human hearing
performance. Three key requirements are: (1)
frequency response, (2) dynamic range, and (3)
accurate spatial reproduction. The requirements for
frequency response have already been surpassed
with sampling rates that exceed human hearing.
The dynamic range limits of human perception
have also been met with current digital audio
systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios
that approach 120 dB. Accurate spatial sound
rendering, however, has not yet reached the limits
of perception as human perception relies on the
combination of sounds arriving from many more
directions than what 5.1-channel surround sound
systems provide. Audyssey DSX technology was
developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering
limitations faced by 5.1-channel surround sound
formats.
The ITU 5.1-channel channel standard recommends
three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers.
The Left (L) and Right (R) front loudspeakers should
be placed at ±30° relative to the central listening
position. The Center (C) loudspeaker should be at
0° and the surround loudspeakers (SL, SR) should
be placed between 100° and 120°. All loudspeakers
must be equidistant from the center listening
position or compensated with time delay if that
is not possible. A separate low-frequency effects
(LFE) channel is used to reproduce additional bass
content from the subwoofer.
There are certain things that 5.1-channel surround
sound systems do well compared to 2-channel
stereo. For example, it is possible to move sounds
across the front seamlessly. It is also possible to
create ambience behind the listener. But 5.1 channel
surround systems do not provide enough channels
from which to render the required refl ected
sound components for a seamless and enveloping
soundstage. Unfortunately, the additional two back
surround channels in 7.1-channel systems are not
in the right place to provide a significant perceptual
improvement.
Adding more channels to a surround system is
not for special effects. Accurate spatial sound
reproduction requires rendering of directional
sound cues and non-directional ambient cues.
Refl ections arriving after the direct sound play a
critical role in the perception of soundstage width
and depth. To have the most impact, additional
surround channels should be used to control the
direction, time of arrival, and frequency response
of the refl ected sound to render an expanded
soundstage that reproduces sound with better
localization and envelopment than what 5.1-channel
systems provide.
Research in the perception of auditory source width
has shown that there are strong preferences in the
direction of refl ected sound and the perception of
soundstage width and spaciousness. The single
most important direction of side-wall refl ections
is ±60°. DSX provides a pair of Wide channels
(LW and RW) at ±60° with appropriate frequency
response and perceptual processing to match the
requirements of human hearing. In fact, the Wide
channels are much more critical in the presentation
of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1-channel systems. A
more enveloping 7.1-channel system is one in which
Wide speakers are used instead of Back Surround
speakers. Adding surround channels behind the
listener has a very small impact compared to the
increase in envelopment and soundstage width that
the front wide channels will provide.
After side refl ections, the next most important
acoustical and perceptual cues come from refl
ections above the front stage. DSX provides a pair
of Height channels (LH and RH) at a ±45° azimuth
angle and elevated to a 45° angle in the median
plane.
In addition to creating new Wide and Height
channels, DSX also provides Surround Processing
to enhance the envelopment of the Surround and
Back Surround channels (if present). DSX Surround
Processing processes the standard surround signals
in the time and frequency domains to improve the
perceived sense of envelopment and blending with
the other speakers in the surround system.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a scalable
system that can adapt to the practical needs of the
user. The first level of surround stage enhancement
comes from adding the Wide channels. The second
level comes from adding the Height channels. If it
is practical to have both Wides and Heights then
the surround performance will be further enhanced.
DSX automatically reconfigures its processing to
optimize surround rendering over any number of
available speakers beyond that of 5.1-channel.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased
by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem
with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ
is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the
playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround
impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Audyssey MultEQ XT is a room equalization
solution that calibrates any audio system so that
it can achieve optimum performance for every
listener in a large listening area. Based on several
room measurements, MultEQ XT calculates an
equalization solution that corrects for both time
and frequency response problems in the listening
area and also performs a fully automated surround
system setup.
Auto Lip Sync
If you connect this unit to a TV that supports the
Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct
delay between the audio and video.
B
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-distance wireless
communication technology used for connecting
handheld devices several meters apart. This enables
notebook computers, PDA s, mobile phones, etc. to
connect without a cable for transmitting audio and
data.
D
Deep Color
This technology allows expression of more number
of colors than the conventional 8 bits and can
reproduce colors close to natural ones without color
streak.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/
or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Some contents may not be compatible with other
DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
A total of 5.1 channels are played: 3 front channels
(“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels
(“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between
channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-
dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement
and positioning) is achieved.
A realistic, powerful sense of presence is achieved
when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format
proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users
to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL
SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by
Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.
The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back
channels, provide improved sound positioning and
expression of space.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal
format that is compatible with up to 7.1 channels
of discrete digital sound and also improves sound
quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance.
It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby
Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to
the source signal and the conditions of the playback
equipment.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 109 2010/08/23 18:33:27
110
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Dolby Headphone
The Dolby Headphone technology provides
a surround sound listening experience over
headphones.
When listening to multichannel content such
as DVD movies over headphones, the listening
experience is fundamentally different than listening
to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers
are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening
experience differs greatly from traditional speaker
playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone
perspective curves to solve this problem and
provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater
listening experience. Dolby Headphone also
delivers exceptional 3D audio from stereo material.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless
coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound
of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to
8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of
96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit
resolution. Dolby TrueHD is adopted for applications
that put very high importance on sound quality.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into
5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into
stereo and full band signals (with a frequency
response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create
a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich
sense of presence for all stereo sources.
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of
the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded
to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1 channels.
There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing
music, “Movie” suited for playing movies, and
“Game” which is optimized for playing games.
Explanation of terms
Dolby Pro Logic gz
Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to
Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair
of front height channels. Compatible with stereo,
5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro
Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth
and dimension to movies, concert video and video
game playback while maintaining the full integrity
of the source mix.
Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial
cues that occur naturally in all content, directing
this information to the front height channels,
complementing the performance of left and right
surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded
with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information
can be even more revealing, with perceptually
discrete height channel information bringing an
exciting new dimension to home entertainment.
Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is
also an ideal alternative for households that cannot
support the placement of back surround speakers
of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have
bookshelf space available to support the addition of
height speakers.
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technology certified
by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized
surround sound experience from two speakers
using a multichannel Dolby Digital source.
Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the
surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic
or Dolby Pro Logic g.
Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original
Multichannel audio information and provides the
listener with the sensation of being surrounded by
additional speakers.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of
surround audio to less number of channels and
plays back.
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System,
which is a digital audio system developed by DTS.
When playing back audio by connecting this system
with a device such as DTS amplifier, accurate sound
field position and realistic sound effect as if you are
in a movie theater can be obtained.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high
sound quality playback in 5.1 channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround
format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling
frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1 channels
of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete
digital audio format adding a surround back (SB)
channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals
is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital
audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel
to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel
audio signals is also possible according to the
decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit
rates (max. 5.1 channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality
and enhanced functionality than the conventional
DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray
Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high
data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and
lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are
supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved
version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and
DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with
sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to
7.1 channels of discrete digital sound. High data
bit rate performance provides high quality sound.
This format is fully compatible with conventional
products, including conventional DTS digital
surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format
created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This
format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio
channels with a sampling frequency of 96kHz/24bit
resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution.
It is fully compatible with conventional products,
including conventional DTS digital surround
5.1-channel data.
DTS Neural Surround
DTS Neural Surround has been chosen as the
surround sound format for XM Satellite Radio’s
“XM HD Surround”, TV sports broadcasting, 7.1
games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well
as leading FM and HD Radio stations. It delivers
the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of
surround sound by unmasking the audio details,
typically lost by other playback modes. Audiences
will experience the deep ambience and subtle
details of movies, music and games.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology
for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback
with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6
Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS
NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted
sound level and the minimum discernible level
above the noise emitted by the device.
F
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is a codec for
audio data compression.
H
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices,
this copyright protection technology encrypts
the signals to prevent content from being copied
without authorization.
HDMI
This is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can
be connected to a TV or amplifier. Video signal and
audio signal can be connected using 1 cable.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 110 2010/08/23 18:33:27
111
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Explanation of terms
L
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect,
which is an output channel that emphasizes
low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep
bass.
M
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the
MAIN ZONE .
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data
compression scheme, using the “MPEG-1” video
compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while
maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2,
MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format
standards used for the encoding of video and audio.
Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”, “MPEG-
2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2
Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
P
Pairing
Pairing is an operation required for settings to
connect two Bluetooth devices. Pairing enables
Bluetooth devices to access each other.
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of video signal that
displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared
to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and bleeding.
Protection Circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to components
within the power supply when an abnormality
such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or
temperature for any reason.
In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit
enters standby mode when an abnormality occurs.
S
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave
(analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing
the height of the wave at each reading in digitized
format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is
called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the
value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω
(ohms). Greater power can be obtained with this
value smaller.
sYCC601 color
Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
V
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet
radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade
costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site
below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiomarantz.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software
and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Nothing Else Matters Software and
BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
W
WAV (Wave)
WAV is a standard audio format of Windows. The
file size tends to increase, but sound near the
original sound can be maintained.
Windows Media DRM
This is a copyright protection technology developed
by Microsoft.
Content providers are using the digital rights
management technology for Windows Media
contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so
that their intellectual property, including copyright,
in such content is not misappropriated. This
device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure
Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of
the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft
revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire
new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure
Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM
Software’s ability to play unprotected content.
A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to
your device whenever you download a license for
Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license,
also download revocation list onto your device on
behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Windows Media Player Ver.11
This is a media player distributed free of charge by
Microsoft Corporation.
It can be used to play playlists created with
Windows Media Player Ver. 11 as well as files in
such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows
Media® Player Ver.7, 7.1, Windows Media®Player
for Windows® XP and Windows Media® Player 9
Series.
To encode WMA files, only use applications
authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use
an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
X
x.v.Color
This function lets HDTVs display colors more
accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid
colors. “x.v.Color” is a Sony registered trademark.
Z
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2
playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is called
ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3
playback). The room for ZONE3 playback is called
ZONE3.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 111 2010/08/23 18:33:27
112
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the user guide?
3. Are the other components operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,
there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
GGeneralH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Power does not turn
on.
• Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power
outlet.
7
Display is off. • Set “Display” on the menu to something other than “OFF”. 86
Set does not operate
properly.
• Reset the microprocessor. 115
GVideoH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No picture appears. • Check the TV connection.
• Set the TV input correctly.
7
7
GAudioH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Audio is not output. • Check the connections for all devices.
• Check the speaker connections.
• Check whether the audio device power is turned on.
• Adjust the master volume.
• Cancel the mute mode.
• Select a suitable input source.
• Select a suitable input mode.
• Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the speakers
or the PRE OUT connectors when headphones are connected.
7, 16 – 24
6, 49 – 51
–
26, 62
26, 62
25, 62
71
98
No sound is
produced from
surround speaker.
• Check if the surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND
terminals.
–
No sound is
produced from
surround back
speaker.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
• Set the surround mode to something other than “STEREO”.
78
78
44
No sound is
produced from front
height speaker.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
78
78
No sound is
produced from front
wide speaker.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Wide” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
78
79
No sound is
produced from
subwoofer.
• Check the subwoofer connections.
• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.
• If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”,
and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output
from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected
surround mode.
6, 49 – 51
7
78
78, 79
DTS sound is not
output.
• Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”. 71
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-
HD, Dolby Digital
Plus audio is not
output.
• Make HDMI connections. 16
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 112 2010/08/23 18:33:27
113
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
GHDMIH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No audio is
output with HDMI
connection.
• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
• When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI
Audio Out” on the menu to “AMP”.
• When outputting HDMI audio from a TV, set “HDMI Audio Out”
on the menu to “TV”.
16
80
80
No video is
output with HDMI
connection.
• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
• Set the input source to match the connected HDMI connector.
• Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection
(HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video
will not be output correctly.
16
16, 25
15
When the following
operations are
performed on
devices compatible
with HDMI control,
the same operations
occur on this unit.
• Power ON/OFF
• Switching audio
output devices
• Adjust volume
• Switch input source
• Set “HDMI Control” on the menu to “OFF”. To operate power
only for each device, set “Power Off Control” to “OFF”.
55, 81
GSIRIUS Satellite RadioH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
“CHECK SIRIUS
TUNER” is displayed.
• The SiriusConnect Home Tuner unit is not connected. Check that
the connections are correct.
22
”ANTENNA ERROR”
is displayed.
• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are
correct.
22
”NO SIGNAL” is
displayed.
• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are
correct.
–
”INVALID
CHANNEL” is
displayed.
• Channel is not present. Select another channel. –
”ACQUIRING
SIGNAL” is
displayed.
• The signal cannot be received. Reposition your SiriusConnect
Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.
• Displays while SiriusConnect Home Tuner is connected. Reposition
your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.
–
–
”Call SIRIUS”z is
displayed.
• Channels are not subscribed to. If you subscribe to the channel,
you can receive the channel.
–
”SUBSCRIPTION
UPDATED” is
displayed.
• While updating contract information. –
”Enter Lock Code
[ ]” is displayed.
• Selected channels are locked. Please insert pass word (4 digits)
into “[ ]”
–
z After scroll displays “Call 888-539-....” twice, displays “Call SIRIUS”.
GHD Radio receiverH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Reception fails, or
there is a lot of noise
or distortion.
• Change the antenna orientation or position.
• Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
• Use an FM outdoor antenna.
• Separate the antenna from other connection cables.
22
22
22
22
GM-XPortH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Audio is not output
when a wireless
receiver (RX101 is
connected).
• Check that the Bluetooth device and Wireless receiver (RX101)
are correctly paired.
–
GInternet radio / Media server / iPod / USB memory device / Flickr / Napster / Pandora / RhapsodyH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
When a USB
memory device is
connected, “USB” is
not displayed on the
menu.
• The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the
connection.
• A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or
MTP standards is connected. Connect a USB memory device
conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.
• A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.
This is not a malfunction. Marantz does not guarantee that all USB
memory devices will operate or receive power.
• USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB
memory device directly to the USB port.
20
–
–
–
Files on a USB
memory device
cannot be played.
• USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.
Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB
memory device’s operating instructions.
• USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions. When
divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition
can be played.
• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a
compatible format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
–
–
28
28
The file names
are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
• Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a
malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are
replaced with a “.”.
–
Internet radio cannot
be played.
• Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is
disconnected. Check the connection status.
• Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only
Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this
set.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the
computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station
that is currently broadcasting.
• IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
24
34
–
35
83
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 113 2010/08/23 18:33:27
114
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Files stored on a
computer cannot be
played.
• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible
format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
• Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB
port cannot be used for connection to a computer.
34
34
–
Server is not found,
or it is not possible
to connect to the
server.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the
computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
• Server is not running. Launch the server.
• Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
• Connecting to the media server may take a few minutes the first
time you attempt to make a connection.
–
–
–
83
–
iPod cannot be
played.
• Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the
USB port.
20
When an iPod is
connected, “No
Connection” is
displayed.
• “No Connection” may display if you connect an iPod that has
only a small amount of charge remaining in its battery to this unit.
Should this occur, charge the iPod before connecting it to this unit.
–
Cannot connect to
preset or favorite
radio stations.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before
trying again.
• Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to
connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.
–
–
For some radio
stations, “Server
Full” or “Connection
Down” is displayed
and station cannot be
connected to.
• Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while
before trying again.
–
Sound is broken
during playback.
• Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines
or radio station is congested. This is not a malfunction. When
playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be
broken, depending on the communications conditions.
–
Sound quality is poor
or played sound is
noisy.
• File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction. –
Cannot login
to Rhapsody.
(“Incorrect
Username or
Password” is
displayed.)
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Rhapsody
has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is
not displayed.)
www.rhapsody.com/marantz
83
Cannot compile
Playlist.
• This unit does not respond to playlist compilation. When the
playlist is compiled in PC Application, it is registered to “My
Library”. In this way, the playlist can be played in this unit
–
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Cannot delete
Rhapsody Channel
registered in “My
Channels”
• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application. –
Cannot delete
Tracks, Playlists,
Channels registered
in “My Library”
• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application. –
Cannot login to
Napster. (“Incorrect
Username or
Password” is
displayed.)
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Napster
has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is
not displayed.)
http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
83
Cannot login to
Pandora. (“Email
address” or
“Password” is
displayed.)
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the “Email address” for
Pandora has been properly entered. Re-enter the “Password”.
(Password is not displayed.)
http://www.pandora.com/marantz
40
GRemote Control UnitH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The set cannot be
operated with the
remote control unit.
• Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
• Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m
from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.
• Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control
unit.
• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and
w marks.
• The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct
sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set
to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed
to strong light.
102
102
102
102
102
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 114 2010/08/23 18:33:27
115
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Resetting the microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.
Various setting details can be saved and reset on this device. If setting details are saved before returning
to the default values, after returning to the default settings, setting details can be returned to the same
values as before returning to the defaults.
SLEEP
MENUAUTO ENTER
SURROUND MODE
ON/STANDBY
1When the power is ON, press and hold SLEEP and ENTER for more than 3 seconds.
After “MEMORY SAVING” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE”is shown to inform you that the
settings have been saved.
2Turn off the power using ON/STANDBY.
3Press ON/STANDBY while simultaneously pressing SURROUND MODE and AUTO.
4Once the display starts ashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two
buttons.
5Press and hold SLEEP and MENU for more than 3 seconds.
After “MEMORY LOAD” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE” is shown to inform you that the
settings have returned to those saved in step 1.
• To return all of the settings to the default values, perform steps 2 to 4 without performing step 1.
• If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 115 2010/08/23 18:33:27
116
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Specifications
nAudio section
• Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
S/N: 105 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Rated output: Unbalanced pre-output: 1.2 V
Balanced pre-output: 2.4 V
• Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
Rated output: 150 mV
Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
nVideo section
• Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — +1, –3 dB
• Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when “Video Convert” set to “OFF”)
nTuner section [FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω, 0 dBf = 1 x 10–15 W)
Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz 530 kHz – 1710 kHz
Usable Sensitivity: 1.5 μV (14.8 dBf) 18 μV
S/N (IHF-A): MONO 78 dB
STEREO 68 dB
HD 85 dB 85 dB
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.1 %
STEREO 0.2 %
HD 0.02 % 0.02 %
nGeneral
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 60 W
0.2 W (Standby)
4.0 W (CEC standby)
Maximum external dimensions: 440 (W) x 187 (H) x 395 (D) mm
Weight: 10.1 kg
nRemote control unit (RC011SR)
Batteries: R03/AAA Type (two batteries)
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 116 2010/08/23 18:33:27
117
Basic versionSimple version Advanced version
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISITALIANOESPAÑOLNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
Information
Index
vNumerics
2.1-channel ························································· 51
3D ·······································································15
5.1-channel ··················································· 49, 50
6.1-channel ··················································· 48, 50
7.1-channel ··············································· 5, 48, 49
vA
A2DP ·························································· 23, 109
Accessories ·························································· 2
Add New Feature ··············································· 86
Adjust CH ··························································· 76
Adjusting the master volume ····························· 26
Adobe RGB color / Adobe YCC601 color ········· 109
A-DSX Soundstage ············································· 75
AM loop antenna ················································ 22
Amp Assign ························································ 78
Antenna Aiming ··················································68
ARC ···································································· 15
Aspect ································································ 70
Audio Adjust ······················································· 73
Audio cable ·······················6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23
Audio Delay ························································ 76
Audio Setup ························································81
Audio/Video Adjust ············································· 72
Audyssey Auto Setup ·····································8, 52
Audyssey DSX ····················································75
Audyssey Dynamic EQ ······························· 74, 109
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(A-DSX) ····························································· 109
Audyssey Dynamic Volume ······················· 75, 109
Audyssey MultEQ XT ··························· 74, 99, 109
Audyssey Settings ············································· 74
Auto Lip Sync ············································· 80, 109
Auto Preset ························································ 67
Auto Setup ····················································· 8, 52
vB
Base Curve Copy ················································76
Bass ····························································· 73, 83
Bass Setting ······················································· 79
Bi-amp ································································ 51
Bluetooth ····················································23, 109
Brightness ·························································· 77
vC
Cable
Audio cable ····················· 6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23
Coaxial digital cable ········································· 18
Component video cable ························ 17, 18, 19
Ethernet cable·················································· 24
HDMI cable ···················································7, 16
Optical cable ··································· 17, 19, 20, 21
Speaker cable ···················································· 6
Video cable ··········································· 17, 18, 19
Channel ······························································ 83
Channel Level ···············································56, 79
Characters ·························································· 65
Chroma Level ····················································· 77
C.Image ······························································ 73
Coaxial digital cable ············································ 18
Component 2 Output ········································· 85
Component video cable ························· 17, 18, 19
Condensation ······················································· 3
Connection
7.1CH INPUT terminal ······································ 23
Antenna ··························································· 22
Blu-ray Disc player ·································· 7, 16, 17
Cable TV ··························································· 18
CD player ························································· 20
CD recorder ····················································· 21
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ························ 54
Digital camcorder ······································· 16, 19
DVD player ················································· 16, 18
Game console ·················································· 16
HDMI ······························································· 15
HD Radio receiver ············································ 22
Home network (LAN) ······································· 24
iPod (USB) ························································ 20
Power cord ························································· 7
Record player ··················································· 21
Remote control jacks ······································· 53
RS-232C connector ·········································· 54
Satellite tuner ··················································· 18
Set-top box ················································ 16, 18
SIRIUS ····························································· 22
Speaker ························································ 5, 49
TV···························································· 7, 16, 17
USB memory device ········································ 20
Video cassette recorder ····························· 16, 19
Wireless receiver (RX101) ································ 23
Contrast ······························································77
Crossover Frequency ········································· 80
C.Width ······························································ 73
vD
D.Comp ······························································ 73
Decode Mode ···················································· 71
Deep Color ················································· 15, 109
Dimension ·························································· 73
Direct mode ······················································· 27
Display ··························································86, 99
Distance ····························································· 79
DLNA ································································109
DNR ····································································77
Dolby
Dolby Digital············································· 45, 109
Dolby Digital EX ······································· 45, 109
Dolby Digital Plus ····································· 45, 109
Dolby Headphone ·····································46, 110
Dolby Pro Logic II ············································110
Dolby Pro Logic IIx ··········································110
Dolby Pro Logic IIz ····································48, 110
Dolby TrueHD ············································45, 110
Dolby Virtual Speaker ································46, 110
Downmix ·························································· 110
DRC ···································································· 73
DTS ···························································· 45, 110
DTS 96/24 ·················································45, 110
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 ·································45, 110
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ····································45, 110
DTS-HD ·····················································45, 110
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ······················110
DTS-HD Master Audio ····································110
DTS Digital Surround ······································110
DTS Express ···················································110
DTS NEO:6™ Surround ····························44, 110
DTS Neural Surround ································45, 110
Dynamic EQ ······················································· 74
Dynamic range ················································· 110
Dynamic Volume ················································ 75
vE
Enhancer ···························································· 77
EQ Customize ···················································· 81
Error messages (Auto Setup) ····························· 11
Ethernet cable ···················································· 24
vF
Fader function ···················································· 56
F.Height ······························································78
Firmware Update ··············································· 86
FLAC ································································110
Flickr ····························································· 35, 38
FM indoor antenna ············································· 22
Front A/B (connection) ································· 49, 51
Front height speaker ···································· 48, 49
Front Panel ························································· 98
Front wide speaker ······································ 48, 49
F.Wide ································································ 79
vG
GUI ····································································· 84
vH
HDCP ························································· 15, 110
HDMI ··························································15, 110
HDMI 1.4a ·························································· 15
HDMI Audio Out ················································ 80
HDMI cable ···················································· 7, 16
HDMI Control ··············································· 55, 80
HDMI Setup ······················································· 80
HD Radio reception ······································ 22, 32
Headphones ······················································· 98
Height Gain ························································ 73
HPF ···································································· 83
HT-EQ ·································································73
Hue ·····································································77
vI
Information ························································· 88
Audio Input Signal ············································ 88
HDMI Information ············································ 88
Preset Channel ················································ 88
Status ······························································· 88
Input Assign ······················································· 68
Input Mode ·························································71
Input Setup ·························································66
Input signal ················································· 45, 106
Inputting characters ··········································· 65
Interval ······························································· 72
i/p Scaler ·····························································70
vL
Learn function ···················································· 93
Level Lch ···························································· 83
Level Rch ··························································· 83
LFE ····························································· 73, 111
Listening mode ·················································· 44
Listening position ················································· 8
vM
Macro function ··················································· 95
Maintenance Mode ············································ 86
MAIN ZONE ····················································· 111
Manual EQ ························································· 76
Manual Setup ····················································· 77
Master volume display ······································· 85
M-DAX ································································76
Menu map ·························································· 63
Monitor Out ························································80
MP3 ··································································111
MPEG ······························································· 111
MPEG-4 AAC ····················································111
MultEQ XT ··························································74
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 117 2010/08/23 18:33:27
118
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Mute Level ························································· 84
M-XPort ······························································ 23
vN
Napster ·························································35, 39
Network Setup ··················································· 81
Napster Account ·············································· 83
Network Connecting ········································ 81
Network Information ········································ 83
Other································································ 82
Rhapsody Account ··········································· 83
vO
Optical cable ·····································17, 19, 20, 21
Option Setup ······················································ 84
Add New Feature ············································· 86
Component 2 Output ······································· 85
Display ····························································· 86
Firmware Update ············································· 86
GUI··································································· 84
Maintenance Mode·········································· 86
Setup Lock ······················································· 86
Source Delete ·················································· 84
Trigger Out ······················································· 85
Volume Control ················································ 84
Zone Rename ·················································· 85
vP
Pairing ······························································ 111
Pandora ························································ 35, 40
Panel lock function ············································· 60
Panorama ··························································· 73
Parameter Check ················································ 12
Parental Lock ······················································67
Picture Adjust ····················································· 77
Playback
Blu-ray Disc player ··········································· 26
CD player ························································· 26
Direct ······························································· 46
DVD player ······················································· 26
Flickr································································· 38
HD Radio reception ·········································· 32
Internet radio ··················································· 35
iPod(USB) ························································· 27
Media server ···················································· 37
MP3 ··························································· 28, 34
MPEG-4 AAC ··················································· 34
Multi-channel ··················································· 44
Napster ···························································· 39
Network audio ················································· 34
Pandora ···························································· 40
Pure direct ······················································· 46
Rhapsody ························································· 42
SIRIUS ····························································· 30
Stereo ······························································ 46
USB memory device ········································ 28
WMA ························································· 28, 34
ZONE2 ····························································· 62
ZONE3 ····························································· 62
Playback Mode ··················································· 71
Power Off Control ·············································· 81
Power On Level ················································· 84
Preset codes ······················································ 91
Preset Name ······················································ 68
Preset Skip ························································· 67
Presetting radio stations ···································· 33
Progressive ······················································ 111
Progressive Mode ·············································· 70
Protection circuit ·············································· 111
vR
Random ······························································ 71
Rear panel ························································ 100
Reference Level Offset ······································ 74
Remote control settings ····································· 89
Remote control unit ··································· 90, 101
Inserting the batteries ···································· 102
Operating AV equipment ································· 90
Operating components ···································· 92
Registering Preset Codes ································ 91
Remote mode ···················································· 27
Rename ······························································ 71
Repeat ································································ 71
Resetting the microprocessor ·························· 115
Resolution ·························································· 70
RGB Range ·························································80
Rhapsody ····················································· 35, 42
vS
Sampling frequency ········································· 111
S.Back ································································ 78
Screensaver ······················································· 84
Selecting the input source ································· 25
Setup Lock ························································· 86
SIRIUS ·························································· 22, 30
Sleep timer ························································· 56
Slide Show ························································· 72
Source Delete ···················································· 84
Source Level ······················································ 71
Speaker
Connect ··························································· 49
Install ··························································· 5, 48
Set up ·························································· 8, 52
Speaker cable ······················································· 6
Speaker Config. ·················································· 78
Speaker impedance ··········································111
Speaker Setup ···················································· 78
Stage Height ······················································ 75
Stage Width ······················································· 75
Standby Source ·················································· 81
Still Picture ························································· 72
Subwoofer setting ················································ 9
Surround back speaker ······················· 5, 48, 49, 50
Surround Mode ·········································· 44, 104
Surround Parameter ··········································· 73
Switcheing the light illumination ························ 89
Switching the front speakers ····························· 26
sYCC601 color ··················································111
vT
Tone ··································································· 73
Tone Control ·······················································73
Trademark ························································ 103
Treble ··························································· 73, 83
Trigger Out ························································· 85
Troubleshooting ··············································· 112
Turning off the sound temporarily ······················ 26
Turn off power (standby) ···································· 12
Turn on power ······················································ 7
vV
Video ·································································· 69
Video cable ············································· 17, 18, 19
Video conversion ················································ 14
Video Convert ·····················································70
Video Mode ························································ 70
Video Select ······················································· 69
Volume Control ·················································· 84
Volume Level ····················································· 83
Volume Limit ················································ 83, 84
vTuner ······························································ 111
vW
WAV ································································· 111
Web control ························································58
Windows Media DRM ······································ 111
Windows Media Player Ver.11 ························· 111
Wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal ········· 57
WMA ································································ 111
vX
x.v.Color ····················································· 15, 111
vZ
ZONE2 ··················································61, 99, 111
ZONE3 ··················································61, 99, 111
Zone Rename ····················································· 85
Zone Setup ························································· 83
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 118 2010/08/23 18:33:28
Device select : BD
Blu-ray Disc Player
DDenon 5034, 5035, 5036
HHitachi 5031, 5032, 5033
IIntegra 5013
JJWC 5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,
5019, 5020
LLG 5010, 5011
MMarantz 5000, 5026, 5027
Mitsubishi 5024, 5025
OOnkyo 5013
PPanasonic 5001, 5002, 5003
Philips 5004
Pioneer 5005
RRCA 5012
SSamsung 5005
Sharp 5028, 5029, 5030
Sony 5007, 5008, 5009, 5016
TToshiba 5012
YYamaha 5021, 5022, 5023
Device select : DVD
DVD Player
AAiwa 2036, 2037
Apex 2012, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2021, 2034
BBOSE 2038, 2039, 2063
DDenon 2047, 2048
FFunai 2049
GGE 2009, 2020, 2029, 2033
HHarman Kardon 2061
Hitachi 2008, 2012, 2031
JJVC 2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043
KKenwood 2053, 2054
Koss 2058
MMagnavox 2007, 2011, 2023, 2025
Marantz 2025, 2065
Marantz (Blu-ray) 2064
Mitsubishi 2011, 0215
OOnkyo 2062
Oritron 2009, 2030
PPanasonic 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055
Philips 2007, 2011, 2058
Pioneer 2002, 2014, 2056
Proscan 2009, 2020, 2032
RRCA 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035,
2057
SSampo 2041
Samsung 2008, 2012, 2022, 2024,
2027
Sanyo 2050, 2052
Sharp 2044, 2045
Sherwood 2051
Sony 2001, 2013, 2059
TToshiba 2004, 2008, 2026, 2028
YYamaha 2046, 2060
ZZenith 2010
Device select : SAT
Satellite Receiver
AAlphastar 4027
Amstrad 4046, 4047, 4050
Atsky 4048
BB Sky B 4021, 4045, 4046
CChaparral 4039
DDIRECTV 4001, 4016, 4044
DISH Network 4030
Drake 4026
EEchostar 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,
4020, 4062, 4063, 4064
Eurosky 4047, 4056
Express Vu 4017
FFoxtel 4051
Freesat 4056
Fujitsu 4025
GGE 4002, 4008, 4009
General Instruments 4036, 4037
Gradiente 4044, 4057
HHitachi 4001, 4015
Hughes 4001, 4016
Humax 4049, 4050, 4051, 4052,
4053
JJaneil 4025
JVC 4017
MMitsubishi 4001
NNokia 4058, 4059, 4060, 4061
OOptima 4048
PPanasonic 4004, 4010
Philips 4031, 4035, 4044, 4057
Proscan 4002, 4008, 4009, 4011
RRadio Shack 4036, 4037
RCA 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029
Realistic 4040
Rural Cable 4036
SSamsung 4022, 4027, 4042, 4043,
4050, 4054, 4055
Schneider 4041, 4043
SKY 4044, 4045, 4057
Skyplus 4048
Skysat 4041, 4047, 4056
Sony 4003, 4012, 4014, 4065,
4066, 4067
Star Choice 4032
Star Trak 4024
STS 4038
SuperDish 4028
TTeac 4049
Thomson 4046, 4056
Toshiba 4001, 4034
UUniden 4005, 4006, 4013
Universum 4056
VVideo Pall 4025
ZZenith 4023, 4025, 4033
Device select : TV
Television
AAcer 1141
Admiral 1002, 1009, 1089
Aiko 1059
Aiwa 1117, 1118
Akai 1001
Amtron 1023
Anam 1113
Anam National 1023, 1069, 1092
AOC 1003, 1024, 1049, 1127
Audiovox 1023
BBell & Howell 1009, 1025
Benq 1104, 1142
Broksonic 1003, 1097, 1098, 1113
CCelebrity 1001
Citizen 1003, 1013, 1023, 1026,
1059, 1063
Colortyme 1003, 1043
Contec 1113
Contec/Cony 1023, 1045, 1047
Craig 1020, 1022, 1023, 1113
Crown 1023, 1067
Curtis Mathes 1003, 1013, 1025, 1026,
1062, 1103, 1110
DDaewoo 1003, 1013, 1024, 1035,
1036, 1059, 1084, 1101
Daytron 1003, 1013, 1016
Dimensia 1103, 1110
Dumont 1003, 1010, 1153
EElectroband 1001
Electrohome 1001, 1003, 1069, 1133
Emerson
1003, 1013, 1015, 1020,
1021, 1022, 1023, 1025,
1038, 1044, 1045, 1048,
1055, 1061, 1094, 1096,
1099, 1101, 1113
Envision 1003
FFisher 1025, 1051, 1091, 1160
Fujitsu 1038, 1124, 1125, 1155
Funai 1023, 1038, 1113
GGateway 1150
GE
1003, 1018, 1022, 1046,
1054, 1069, 1085, 1103,
1110, 1113, 1133, 1136,
1153
Goldstar
1003, 1013, 1024, 1030,
1045, 1080, 1100
1112, 1154
HHallmark 1003
Hisense 1116
Hitachi
1003, 1012, 1031, 1032,
1037, 1041, 1045, 1047,
1065, 1068, 1082, 1088,
1094, 1139, 1140, 1145,
1159
IInfi nity 1067
JJaneil 1134
JBL 1067
JC Penney
1003, 1013, 1018, 1019,
1024, 1026, 1046, 1047,
1054, 1063, 1083, 1085,
1100, 1103, 1110, 1112,
1133, 1154
Jensen 1003
JVC 1028, 1029, 1045, 1047,
1050, 1060, 1065
KKawasho 1001, 1003
Kenwood 1003
Kloss Novabeam 1023, 1056, 1057, 1134
KTV 1013, 1023, 1033, 1034,
1073, 1099, 1113
LLG 1024, 1030
MM.Wards 1002, 1009, 1038
Magnavox
1003, 1052, 1053, 1056,
1057, 1063, 1067, 1081,
1106
Marantz 1003, 1031, 1067, 1122
Mitsubishi 1003, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1122, 1133
Motorola 1014, 1069
NNEC 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043,
1069
NET-TV 1137, 1150
OOrion 1020, 1096
PPanasonic 1017, 1067, 1069, 1095,
1111
Philips
1003, 1011, 1045, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1057, 1058,
1063, 1067, 1069, 1106
Pioneer
1003, 1018, 1037, 1070,
1071, 1094, 1145, 1147,
1149
Plasmsync 1135
Portland 1003, 1013, 1024, 1059
Price Club 1026
Prism 1018
Proscan 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,
1008, 1085, 1103, 1110
Proton 1003, 1045
QQuasar 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111,
1153
RRadio Shack
1003, 1013, 1015, 1023,
1024, 1025, 1045, 1100,
1103, 1110, 1113
RCA
1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008, 1014, 1024,
1049, 1069, 1075, 1079,
1085, 1087, 1088, 1093,
1094, 1101, 1103, 1110,
1113, 1153
Realistic 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025,
1045, 1100, 1103, 1110
Runco 1010, 1153
SSampo 1150
Samsung
1003, 1013, 1024, 1026,
1040, 1045, 1062, 1078,
1083, 1090, 1100, 1105,
1114, 1120, 1121, 1146,
1148, 1157
Sansui 1119
Sanyo
1003, 1025, 1051, 1072,
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157,
1158
Sharp
1003, 1013, 1014, 1015,
1045, 1055, 1064, 1066,
1076, 1089, 1123
Signature 1009
Sony 1001, 1102, 1108
Soundesign 1003, 1023, 1038, 1063,
1113
Starlite 1023
Supre-Macy 1134
Sylvania
1003, 1039, 1042, 1052,
1053, 1056, 1057, 1063,
1067, 1089, 1151
Symphonic 1023, 1039, 1044
TTandy 1014
Tatung 1069
Technics 1018
Techwood 1003, 1018
Teknika
1003, 1009, 1013, 1023,
1024, 1026, 1038, 1045,
1047, 1059, 1063, 1111,
1113
Telecaption 1074
Toshiba
1003, 1019, 1025, 1026,
1042, 1074, 1098, 1107,
1111, 1135, 1136
Totevision 1013
UUniversal 1046, 1054
PRESET CODE 1
List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés / Lista de códigos pre-ajustados
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:25:15
VVideo Concepts 1113
Viewsonic
1006, 1022, 1109, 1128,
1129, 1130, 1131, 1138,
1143, 1145, 1150
WWards
1003, 1009, 1015, 1024,
1038, 1044, 1046, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1057, 1067,
1086, 1103, 1110
White
Westinghouse 1001, 1101
YYamaha 1003, 1024
ZZenith 1003, 1009, 1010, 1132,
1144, 1153
Device select : CD
CD Player
AAIWA 3001, 3002, 3003
AKAI 3004, 3005, 3006
AUDIO 3007
AUDIO LABS 3008
CCALIFORNIA 3008
CARVER 3010, 3011, 3009
CASIO 3012, 3020
CURTIS 3020, 3012
DDENON 3013
EEMERSON 3014
FFISHER 3011, 3015, 3016, 3017,
3018
GGE 3019
GENEXXA 3014, 3021, 3020
HHARMON 3022, 3023, 3051
HITACHI 3020
IINKEL 3024
JJC PENNEY 3012, 3020, 3025
JVC 3026, 3027
KKARDON 3022, 3051, 3023
KRELL 3010
LLUXMAN 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038
LX I 3012, 3020, 3014
MMAGNAVOX 3010, 3039, 3040
MARANTZ 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043
MATHES 3012, 3020
MCS 3012, 3020
MGA 3023
MISSION 3010
MITSUBISHI 3023, 3044
NNAD 3034, 3045
NAKAMICHI 3046, 3047, 3048
NEC MCS 3025
NIKKO 3007, 3016
OONKYO 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,
3055, 3102, 3103
OPTIMUS
3011, 3014, 3020, 3028,
3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,
3058, 3059
PPANASONIC 3008, 3060, 3061
PHILIPS 3009, 3010, 3010, 3040
PIONEER 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063,
3064
QQUASAR 3008
RRCA 3011, 3014, 3065, 3066,
3067, 3068, 3069
REALISTIC 3011, 3014, 3020, 3042,
3054, 3057
ROTEL 3010
RS ORIGINAL 3070
SSAE 3010, 3083
SAMSUNG 3071
SANSUI 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073
SANYO 3011, 3018, 3074, 3075,
3076
SCOTT 3014
SEARS 3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,
3042
SHARP 3028, 3042, 3077
SHERWOOD 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,
3024
SHURE 3025
SONY
3039, 3079, 3080, 3081,
3082, 3097, 3098, 3099,
3100, 3101
SYLVANIA 3010
SYMPHONIC 3083
TTEAC 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083,
3084, 3085, 3086
TECHNICA 3007, 3008, 3061, 3087,
3088
THETA DIGITAL 3040
TOSHIBA 3045
VVICTOR 3026
YYAMAHA 3007, 3089, 3090, 3091,
3092
ZZENITH 3016, 3093, 3094, 3095,
3096
2PRESET CODE
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:25:15
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 3 2010/08/23 18:25:15
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 4 2010/08/23 18:25:15
360.0 (14 3/16)170.5 (6 3/4)
11.5
(1/2)
23.5
(15/16)
16.5
(11/16)
395.0 (15 9/16)187.0 (7 3/8)
440.0 (17 3/8)
Unit : mm (in)
Dimensions / Dimensions / Dimensions
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 5 2010/08/23 18:25:16
D&M Holdings Inc.
Printed in China 5411 10549 026M
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 6 2010/08/23 18:25:16
